06.03.2013 Views

User Guide (Printer/Scanner) - Fuji Xerox Worldwide

User Guide (Printer/Scanner) - Fuji Xerox Worldwide

User Guide (Printer/Scanner) - Fuji Xerox Worldwide

SHOW MORE
SHOW LESS

Create successful ePaper yourself

Turn your PDF publications into a flip-book with our unique Google optimized e-Paper software.

DocumentCentre C400/320/240 Series<br />

<strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (<strong>Printer</strong>/<strong>Scanner</strong>)<br />

This PDF file is best viewed using Acrobat ® Reader 5


Using the printer to print copies of bank notes or securities is illegal and punishable, regardless of whether they<br />

are being used.<br />

Microsoft, MS-DOS, Windows, Windows NT, Microsoft Network are trademarks or registered trademarks of<br />

Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.<br />

Novell, NetWare, IntranetWare, NDS are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc. in the United States. and other<br />

countries.<br />

Adobe, Acrobat, PostScript, Postscript 3, and the PostScript logo are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.<br />

Apple, AppleTalk, EtherTalk, LocalTalk, Macintosh, Mac OS, TrueType are registered trademarks of Apple<br />

Computer, Inc.<br />

Intel and Pentium are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation.<br />

UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries, licensed exclusively through X/Open<br />

Company Ltd.<br />

Solaris, Sun OS, and NIS (Network Information Services) are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun<br />

Microsystems Inc. in the United States.<br />

HP, HPGL, HPGL/2 and HP-UX are registered trademarks of Japan Hewlett Packard Company.<br />

All product/brand names are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective holders.<br />

Permission has been obtained from Microsoft Corporation for use of software screen shots.<br />

Our printer software uses some of the codes created by the Independent JPEG Group.<br />

Saved data may be lost if hard disk of the machine breaks down due to external shocks or if the power is<br />

accidentally cut off in a manner not following the methods listed in manuals or other documentations. <strong>Fuji</strong> <strong>Xerox</strong><br />

is not responsible for such data loss and any consequence caused by such data loss.<br />

<strong>Fuji</strong> <strong>Xerox</strong> is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due to infection of computer virus.<br />

Important<br />

1 This guide is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this guide may not be copied in<br />

whole or part, without the written consent of the publisher.<br />

2 Parts of this guide are subjected to change without prior notice.<br />

3 We welcome any comments on ambiguities, errors, omissions or missing pages.<br />

4<br />

Never attempt any procedure on the machine that is not specifically described in this guide. Unauthorized<br />

operation can cause faults or accidents. <strong>Fuji</strong> <strong>Xerox</strong> is not liable for any problems resulting from unauthorized<br />

operation of the equipment.<br />

<strong>Xerox</strong>, The Document Company and Ethernet are registered trademarks.<br />

DocuWorks and CentreWare are trademarks.


Preface<br />

Thank you for purchasing the <strong>Fuji</strong> <strong>Xerox</strong> DocumentCentre C400/320/240 Series.<br />

Written with the new user in mind, this <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (<strong>Printer</strong>/<strong>Scanner</strong>) provides all the necessary<br />

information and precautions on operating the printer/scanner functions as well as using<br />

this machine as a network printer.<br />

To get the most out of this machine, please read this guide before using it. This guide is written<br />

with the assumption that you are familiar with the basic knowledge and way of operating<br />

your computer and the network environment. After reading it keep this guide handy as a reference<br />

for problems which you might encounter when using this machine.<br />

For more information on using this machine and the copier features, see the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong><br />

(Copier) and for information on fax features, see the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Facsimile).<br />

In this guide, DocumentCentre C400/320/240 may be referred to as the DocumentCentre<br />

C400/320/240 series.<br />

In this guide, precautions are indicated with the symbol . Always read and follow these instructions<br />

before carrying out the required procedure. Also, thoroughly read the Safety Notes provided in this<br />

guide.<br />

As a member of the International Star Program, <strong>Fuji</strong> <strong>Xerox</strong> certifies that this product satisfies<br />

the Japanese requirements for International Star Program standards.<br />

<strong>Fuji</strong> <strong>Xerox</strong> shares the global concern about environmental conservation and has integrated that concern<br />

in its business activities from research and development to disposal. We have implemented a<br />

number of programs to lessen the burden on the environment through totally eliminating ozone-depleting<br />

chlorofluorocarbons from our manufacturing facilities.<br />

We are committed to leadership in the conservation of resources by reusing and recycling post-consumer<br />

waste material such as paper, consumables such as cartridges and parts from copiers and printers<br />

of our customers.<br />

Along with our efforts to make environmental values a part of the <strong>Fuji</strong> <strong>Xerox</strong> culture, DocumentCentre<br />

C400/320/240 adopts recycled components that satisfy our strict quality standards.<br />

About reception interference<br />

If you notice flickering or distorted images or noises on your audio-visual units, your machine may be<br />

causing radio interference. Switch it off immediately. If this interference disappears, the machine is the<br />

cause of the interference. Perform the following procedure until the interference is corrected.<br />

● Reposition or re-orient the machine and the TV and/or radio.<br />

● Move the machine and the TV and/or radio away from each other.<br />

● Unplug the machine, TV and/or radio, and replug them into outlets that operate on different circuits.<br />

● Reorient the TV and/or radio antennas and cables until the interference stops. (For an outdoor<br />

antenna, ask your local electrician for support.)<br />

● Use coaxial cable antennas.<br />

This equipment is certified as a Class 1 laser product under IEC60825. This means that the machine<br />

does not emit hazardous laser radiation. Since radiation emitted inside the machine is completely confined<br />

within the protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape from the<br />

machine during any phase of user operation.<br />

This equipment complies with the guidelines set forth by the Japan Business Machine Makers<br />

Association on the harmonic affects by copiers and other reproduction devices in accordance with<br />

the guidelines on the harmonic suppressors of electronic appliances and general-purpose<br />

machines.<br />

i


ii<br />

Contents<br />

◆ Preface ...................................................................................................................................i<br />

◆ Contents ................................................................................................................................ii<br />

◆ Related <strong>Guide</strong>s .................................................................................................................. viii<br />

◆ Using This <strong>Guide</strong> ..................................................................................................................ix<br />

◆ Safety Notes ........................................................................................................................ xii<br />

Part 1 <strong>Printer</strong><br />

Chapter 1 Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment<br />

1.1 <strong>Printer</strong> Environments ............................................................................................. 4<br />

1.1.1 As Local <strong>Printer</strong>....................................................................................... 4<br />

1.1.2 As Network <strong>Printer</strong> .................................................................................. 5<br />

1.2 Connecting Interface Cable ................................................................................. 10<br />

1.2.1 Connecting by Parallel Interface ........................................................... 10<br />

1.2.2 Connecting by Ethernet Interface.......................................................... 11<br />

1.2.3 Connecting by Token Ring Interface ..................................................... 11<br />

1.3 Setting IP Address............................................................................................... 13<br />

1.3.1 Setting IP Address ................................................................................ 14<br />

1.4 Setting Port.......................................................................................................... 18<br />

1.4.1 Activating Port ....................................................................................... 18<br />

1.5 Memory Allocation ............................................................................................... 22<br />

Chapter 2 Setting up Network<br />

2.1 Windows Network (SMB)..................................................................................... 26<br />

2.1.1 System Structure .................................................................................. 26<br />

2.1.2 Setting Procedure ................................................................................. 27<br />

2.2 TCP/IP (LPD)....................................................................................................... 28<br />

2.2.1 System Structure .................................................................................. 28<br />

2.2.2 Setting Procedure ................................................................................. 29<br />

2.3 Using Internet Printing ......................................................................................... 30<br />

2.3.1 System Structure .................................................................................. 30<br />

2.3.2 Setting Procedure ................................................................................. 31<br />

2.4 NetWare............................................................................................................... 32<br />

2.4.1 System Structure .................................................................................. 32<br />

2.4.2 Interface ................................................................................................ 32<br />

2.4.3 Setting Procedure ................................................................................. 33


Chapter 3 Basic Printing<br />

3.1 Flow of Printing (Windows) .................................................................................. 36<br />

3.2 About Paper......................................................................................................... 37<br />

3.2.1 Difference From Copying....................................................................... 37<br />

3.2.2 Caution for Printing ............................................................................... 37<br />

3.2.3 Paper Supply......................................................................................... 38<br />

3.2.4 Outputting Paper ................................................................................... 39<br />

3.2.5 Loading Paper in Trays 1 to 4................................................................ 39<br />

3.2.6 Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass Tray).................................................. 40<br />

3.2.7 Changing Paper Size of Paper Tray ...................................................... 45<br />

3.3 Printing Features ................................................................................................. 46<br />

3.3.1 Before Printing ...................................................................................... 46<br />

3.3.2 Printing Procedure ................................................................................ 46<br />

3.3.3 Setting Printing Features....................................................................... 47<br />

3.3.4 Using On-line Help ................................................................................ 49<br />

3.4 Installing/Uninstalling the <strong>Printer</strong> Drivers ............................................................. 50<br />

3.4.1 For a Local <strong>Printer</strong>................................................................................. 50<br />

3.4.2 For a Network <strong>Printer</strong> ............................................................................ 53<br />

3.4.3 Uninstalling the <strong>Printer</strong> Drivers.............................................................. 54<br />

3.5 Switching <strong>Printer</strong> Off-line ..................................................................................... 56<br />

3.6 Canceling Printing/Checking Job Status.............................................................. 57<br />

3.6.1 Canceling Printing From Computer ....................................................... 57<br />

3.6.2 Canceling Printing From <strong>Printer</strong> ............................................................ 58<br />

3.6.3 Checking Job Status of Print Instruction ............................................... 60<br />

Chapter 4 Special Printing<br />

4.1 Printing Special Papers ....................................................................................... 64<br />

4.2 Printing Non-Standard Paper Size....................................................................... 66<br />

4.2.1 Customizing Non-Standard Paper Size................................................. 66<br />

4.2.2 Printing Non-Standard Paper Size ........................................................ 68<br />

4.3 Secure Print......................................................................................................... 70<br />

4.3.1 Setting Secure Print Jobs...................................................................... 70<br />

4.3.2 Printing Secure Print Jobs..................................................................... 72<br />

4.4 Sample Print ........................................................................................................ 77<br />

4.4.1 Setting Sample Print Jobs..................................................................... 77<br />

4.4.2 Printing Sample Print Jobs.................................................................... 78<br />

4.5 Delayed Print ....................................................................................................... 83<br />

iii


iv<br />

4.5.1 Setting Delayed Print Jobs.................................................................... 83<br />

4.5.2 Printing Delayed Print Jobs................................................................... 85<br />

4.6 Expanding Print Areas for Printing ...................................................................... 89<br />

4.7 E-mail Printing ..................................................................................................... 91<br />

4.7.1 System Environment ............................................................................. 91<br />

4.7.2 Sending E-mail...................................................................................... 95<br />

4.8 Notify Job End by E-mail ..................................................................................... 97<br />

4.8.1 System Environment ............................................................................. 97<br />

4.8.2 Notifying by E-mail ................................................................................ 99<br />

4.9 Adding Banner Sheet for Printing ...................................................................... 101<br />

4.10 File Upload Printing ........................................................................................... 102<br />

Chapter 5 Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)<br />

5.1 About CentreWare Internet Services................................................................. 106<br />

5.1.1 Introduction ......................................................................................... 106<br />

5.1.2 Structure Screen ................................................................................. 107<br />

5.1.3 System Structure ................................................................................ 108<br />

5.1.4 Target OS and Browsers ..................................................................... 109<br />

5.2 Configuring Browser .......................................................................................... 110<br />

5.2.1 For Netscape Communicator .............................................................. 110<br />

5.2.2 For Internet Explorer ........................................................................... 110<br />

5.2.3 Proxy Server and Port Number ........................................................... 111<br />

5.3 Configuring Machine.......................................................................................... 112<br />

5.4 Activating ........................................................................................................... 113<br />

5.5 Troubleshooting ................................................................................................. 114<br />

Part 2 <strong>Scanner</strong><br />

Chapter 1 Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment<br />

1.1 <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment ........................................................................................ 118<br />

1.1.1 Scanning With the Mailbox.................................................................. 118<br />

1.1.2 Scanning Services With Job Template................................................ 119<br />

1.2 Flow of Configuring Scanning............................................................................ 120<br />

1.3 Using Scan Features ......................................................................................... 121<br />

1.3.1 Target OS and System Environment................................................... 121<br />

1.3.2 Connecting Cable................................................................................ 121


1.4 Configuring for Using Mailbox............................................................................ 122<br />

1.4.1 Setting IP Address .............................................................................. 122<br />

1.4.2 Activating Port for Scanning (Salutation)............................................. 122<br />

1.4.3 Creating Mailbox ................................................................................. 127<br />

1.5 Configuring for Using Job Template................................................................... 133<br />

1.5.1 Setting IP Address .............................................................................. 133<br />

1.5.2 Activating FTP Client........................................................................... 133<br />

1.6 Configuring Computer........................................................................................ 138<br />

1.6.1 Using Mailbox...................................................................................... 138<br />

1.6.2 Using Job Template............................................................................. 138<br />

1.7 Installing the Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility ................................................................ 139<br />

1.7.1 Required Environment......................................................................... 139<br />

1.7.2 Installation ........................................................................................... 140<br />

1.7.3 Uninstallation....................................................................................... 142<br />

Chapter 2 Documents for Scanning<br />

2.1 About Documents .............................................................................................. 144<br />

2.1.1 Suitable Document Sizes .................................................................... 144<br />

2.1.2 Automatic Document Size Sensing ..................................................... 145<br />

2.1.3 Special Documents to Note................................................................. 145<br />

2.2 Loading Documents........................................................................................... 147<br />

2.2.1 On Document Glass............................................................................ 147<br />

2.2.2 In DADF............................................................................................... 148<br />

2.2.3 Document Orientation ......................................................................... 149<br />

2.2.4 Scanning in Batches ........................................................................... 150<br />

Chapter 3 Scanning With Mailbox<br />

3.1 How to Scan ...................................................................................................... 154<br />

3.2 Canceling Scanning/Checking Job Status......................................................... 156<br />

3.2.1 Canceling Scanning From This Machine............................................. 156<br />

3.2.2 Canceling Scanning From Computer .................................................. 158<br />

3.2.3 Checking Job Status of Scan Instruction ............................................ 158<br />

3.3 Configuring Scan Settings ................................................................................. 160<br />

3.3.1 Output Color........................................................................................ 160<br />

3.3.2 Scan Resolution .................................................................................. 162<br />

3.3.3 2 Sided Originals................................................................................. 163<br />

3.3.4 Original Orientation ............................................................................. 166<br />

v


vi<br />

3.3.5 Mixed Size Originals ........................................................................... 168<br />

3.3.6 Scan Size ............................................................................................ 171<br />

3.3.7 Reduce/Enlarge .................................................................................. 174<br />

3.3.8 Bound Originals .................................................................................. 177<br />

3.3.9 Border Erase....................................................................................... 180<br />

3.3.10 Original Type ....................................................................................... 183<br />

3.3.11 Lighter/Darker/Contrast....................................................................... 185<br />

3.3.12 Auto Exposure..................................................................................... 187<br />

3.3.13 Image Compression............................................................................ 189<br />

3.3.14 File Format.......................................................................................... 191<br />

3.4 Importing Scanned Data to Computer ............................................................... 194<br />

3.4.1 Importing to Application Program........................................................ 194<br />

3.4.2 Importing From Mailbox Viewer........................................................... 199<br />

3.4.3 Importing Mailbox Data Using CentreWare Internet Services ............ 201<br />

3.5 Checking/Deleting Scanned Data in Mailbox..................................................... 203<br />

3.5.1 Checking/Deleting on This Machine.................................................... 203<br />

3.5.2 Checking/Deleting on Computer (Mailbox Viewer).............................. 206<br />

3.6 Changing Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility Settings....................................................... 208<br />

3.6.1 Changing Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Driver Settings........................................ 208<br />

3.6.2 Changing Mailbox Viewer Settings...................................................... 212<br />

Chapter 4 Scanning With Job Template<br />

4.1 How to Scan ...................................................................................................... 216<br />

4.1.1 Flow of Scanning................................................................................. 216<br />

4.1.2 Saving in Server (Specifying Job Template) ....................................... 216<br />

4.2 Printing Job Template List ................................................................................. 218<br />

Chapter 5 E-mail Scanning<br />

5.1 Scanning Document to Send as E-mail............................................................. 220<br />

5.1.1 Requirements...................................................................................... 220<br />

5.1.2 Scan and Mail ..................................................................................... 220<br />

5.1.3 Registering Dial Directory ................................................................... 223


Part 3 Appendix<br />

Appendix<br />

A Main Specifications............................................................................................ 232<br />

A.1 Product Specifications......................................................................... 232<br />

A.2 Printable Area ..................................................................................... 233<br />

A.3 Internal Fonts ...................................................................................... 234<br />

A.4 Interface Board (for Token Ring) ......................................................... 235<br />

B <strong>Printer</strong>/<strong>Scanner</strong> Settings (System Administration Mode)................................... 236<br />

C Precautions/Limitations...................................................................................... 237<br />

C.1 SMB .................................................................................................... 237<br />

C.2 TCP/IP (LPD) ...................................................................................... 239<br />

C.3 NetWare .............................................................................................. 241<br />

C.4 Scan Features..................................................................................... 244<br />

C.5 Print Auditron ...................................................................................... 245<br />

D Troubleshooting When Using SMB .................................................................... 246<br />

D.1 Cannot Find <strong>Printer</strong> ............................................................................. 246<br />

D.2 Cannot Print ........................................................................................ 247<br />

D.3 Cannot Delete Documents From <strong>Printer</strong> Window ............................... 247<br />

D.4 Cannot Auto Download <strong>Printer</strong> Driver ................................................. 248<br />

E Troubleshooting When Using TCP/IP ................................................................ 249<br />

E.1 For Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me ...................................... 249<br />

E.2 For Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP............................ 250<br />

F Troubleshooting When Using NetWare.............................................................. 251<br />

F.1 When Not Printed................................................................................ 251<br />

F.2 When “Switch off the power” Appears................................................. 254<br />

F.3 When Target Print Result Is Not Obtained .......................................... 254<br />

F.4 No Notification..................................................................................... 255<br />

G Troubleshooting forCentreWare Internet Services ............................................. 256<br />

H Automatic Gradation Adjustment ....................................................................... 257<br />

I Glossary ............................................................................................................ 258<br />

J Q & A ................................................................................................................. 260<br />

◆ Index.................................................................................................................................. 263<br />

vii


viii<br />

Related <strong>Guide</strong>s<br />

This section describes the guides provided for this machine.<br />

<strong>Guide</strong>s Supplied<br />

We provide the following guides for optimum usage of this machine.<br />

■<strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier)<br />

This guide describes all the necessary steps for copying, clearing paper jams,<br />

daily care, setting the various items, and safety information.<br />

■<strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (<strong>Printer</strong>/<strong>Scanner</strong>) (this guide)<br />

This guide describes all the necessary steps for printing and scanning, setting<br />

the network environment, setting the various items, and troubleshooting.<br />

■<strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Facsimile)<br />

This guide describes all the necessary steps for faxing and troubleshooting<br />

when faxing. This guide is provided with the DocumentCentre C400/320/240<br />

Series machine equipped with the fax function as well as with the optional<br />

Standard G3 Fax Kit.<br />

■ <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (PostScript ® Kit)<br />

This guide describes how to install and use the software that is included in the<br />

PostScript Driver Library. It is included with the PostScript kit.<br />

<strong>Guide</strong>s for Optional Accessories<br />

Optional accessories are also available for this machine. <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>s are provided<br />

with the optional accessories exclusively for the DocumentCentre C400/320/240<br />

Series. These <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>s are referred to as “guides for optional accessories”. <strong>Guide</strong>s<br />

for optional accessories are provided in two forms, printed or as On-line Help.<br />

<strong>Guide</strong>s for optional accessories describe all the necessary steps for operating optional<br />

accessories and installing software.


Using This <strong>Guide</strong><br />

This section describes the organization of this guide.<br />

This guide has been produced for people who operate the DocumentCentre C400/320/240<br />

Series machine equipped with the printer function on a regular daily basis. When reading<br />

this guide, read the chapter that is of particular relevance to the operation you are performing.<br />

What You Need to Know<br />

This guide assumes that the operator has a basic knowledge of the operating<br />

environment of the personal computer in use, networking environments, and<br />

how to operate a personal computer.<br />

For details about the environment of the personal computer in use, basic<br />

knowledge of networking environments, and how to operate a personal computer,<br />

refer to the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong>s provided with the personal computer, operating<br />

system, and network system.<br />

Organization of This <strong>Guide</strong><br />

This guide consists of the following chapters:<br />

Part 1 <strong>Printer</strong><br />

Chapter 1 Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment<br />

This chapter describes how to set up this machine as a printer and use it as a<br />

network printer.<br />

Chapter 2 Setting up Network<br />

This chapter describes how to print with Windows network (SMB), TCP/IP<br />

(LPD), Internet Printing, and NetWare.<br />

Chapter 3 Basic Printing<br />

This chapter describes how to install the printer driver and do basic printing.<br />

Chapter 4 Special Printing<br />

This chapter describes how to do special printing like printing with special<br />

papers, adjusting colors.<br />

ix


x<br />

Chapter 5 Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)<br />

This chapter describes how to use CentreWare Internet Services via a web<br />

browser to change or check printer settings when the machine is in TCP/IP<br />

environment.<br />

Part 2 <strong>Scanner</strong><br />

Chapter 1 Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment<br />

This chapter describes how to set up the machine as a scanner, the environment<br />

to be used and how to install the Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility.<br />

Chapter 2 Documents for Scanning<br />

This chapter describes how to load documents and some special documents<br />

to note when using this machine as a scanner.<br />

Chapter 3 Scanning With Mailbox<br />

This chapter describes how to scan when using the mailbox.<br />

Chapter 4 Scanning With Job Template<br />

This chapter describes how to scan when using Job Template.<br />

Chapter 5 E-mail Scanning<br />

This chapter describes how to do e-mail scanning when using the optional Email<br />

Scanning feature.<br />

Part 3 Appendix<br />

Appendix<br />

This appendix describes items like the main specifications, precautions/limitations,<br />

troubleshooting, Automatic Gradation Adjustment.


Conventions<br />

1 In this guide, host machine refers to a personal computer or workstation and<br />

“DocumentCentre C400/320/240” refers to “<strong>Fuji</strong> <strong>Xerox</strong> DocumentCentre C400/<br />

320/240”.<br />

2 The following icons are used in this guide.<br />

3<br />

Indicates important information and must be read in detail.<br />

Indicates supplementary information.<br />

Indicates references used in this guide. <strong>Guide</strong> titles are noted without double<br />

quotes while specific sections like “1.9.2 Disabling the Power Saver Mode”<br />

are found within double quotes.<br />

Special marks/characters used in this guide.<br />

“ ” : Double quotes indicate the following:<br />

●Messages that appear in the touch panel display and computer<br />

screens.<br />

● Characters to be entered.<br />

●Feature names or buttons that are difficult to understand.<br />

Bold face : Bold face characters refer to selections made like options on the<br />

screen, hard or soft buttons, and keys from the keyboard.<br />

For example: Press ESC.<br />

4 When a checkbox is checked, it indicates ON, otherwise it indicates OFF.<br />

5<br />

The item with the radio button checked is the selected item.<br />

xi


xii<br />

Safety Notes<br />

Read this section carefully before using the DocumentCentre 400/320/240 Series to ensure<br />

that you operate your machine safely.<br />

Also, refer to the “Safety Notes” section of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier).<br />

This section explains the graphic symbols used in this guide.<br />

is used to alert operators to an operating procedure, practice or<br />

condition that, if not strictly observed, may result in severe injury<br />

or loss of life.<br />

is used to alert operators to an operating procedure, practice or<br />

condition that, if not strictly observed, may result in safety<br />

hazards to personnel or damage to the equipment.<br />

This symbol is used to alert operators to a<br />

specific operating procedure that requires close<br />

attention. Read and follow instructions carefully<br />

to ensure the task is accomplished safely.<br />

This symbol is used to alert operators to a<br />

specific operating procedure that must not be<br />

performed. Read instructions carefully and do<br />

not perform any procedures that are prohibited.<br />

This symbol is used to alert operators to a<br />

specific operating procedure that must be<br />

emphasized in order to operate the machine<br />

safely. Read and follow instructions carefully.<br />

Power and Earth Connections<br />

Switch off the machine and the computer before connecting the interface cable. Connecting<br />

the cable or cord with a live machine and computer can cause electric shocks.


Switching Off<br />

Others<br />

● When the power is switched off, print data remaining in the machine and information<br />

spooled in the memory will be erased.<br />

Before switching off the power during normal operation, ensure that the processing<br />

of data stored in the memory is done.<br />

Also, ensure that the touch panel display is completely blank before switching on<br />

the power again.<br />

● If the power is switched on and off continuously, you might not be able to start or<br />

stop the machine properly. If you cannot stop the machine properly, pull out the<br />

electric cord before inserting it again and switching on the power.<br />

xiii


Part 1 <strong>Printer</strong>


1Setting <strong>Printer</strong><br />

Environment<br />

1.1 <strong>Printer</strong> Environments ......................................................................... 4<br />

1.1.1 As Local <strong>Printer</strong> .................................................................. 4<br />

1.1.2 As Network <strong>Printer</strong>.............................................................. 5<br />

1.2 Connecting Interface Cable.............................................................. 10<br />

1.2.1 Connecting by Parallel Interface ....................................... 10<br />

1.2.2 Connecting by Ethernet Interface ..................................... 11<br />

1.2.3 Connecting by Token Ring Interface ................................. 11<br />

1.3 Setting IP Address ........................................................................... 13<br />

1.3.1 Setting IP Address............................................................ 14<br />

1.4 Setting Port ...................................................................................... 18<br />

1.4.1 Activating Port................................................................... 18<br />

1.5 Memory Allocation ........................................................................... 22


Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 4<br />

1<br />

1.1<br />

<strong>Printer</strong> Environments<br />

This section describes the different printer environments that can be set up for this machine.<br />

When connected to a computer directly, this machine can be used as a local printer.<br />

When connected to a network, this machine can be used as a network printer. As this<br />

machine supports multi-protocol, it can be shared among different network environments.<br />

1.1.1 As Local <strong>Printer</strong><br />

Using parallel interface<br />

Connects this machine to a computer by parallel interface for printing.<br />

Use only parallel interface cables provided by our company. Using parallel interface cables from<br />

other company may lead to electric wave obstruction.


1.1.2 As Network <strong>Printer</strong><br />

Windows network (SMB)<br />

1.1 <strong>Printer</strong> Environments<br />

Server Message Block (SMB) is a protocol for sharing file or printer on Windows<br />

95, Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, and Windows<br />

XP. Using SMB, print data or settings can be sent directly to a printer on the<br />

same network (Ethernet interface) without going through a server.<br />

You can begin printing by activating the SMB port, and then registering the<br />

printer on the network on each of the Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me,<br />

Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, and Windows XP operating system (OS).<br />

Depending on the network environment, you may need to set up IP address,<br />

subnet mask and gateway address for the printer. Consult your network administrator<br />

for details on setting the needed item.<br />

“2.1 Windows Network (SMB)” (P. 26) for details on the settings.<br />

Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 1<br />

5


Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 1<br />

6<br />

1.1 <strong>Printer</strong> Environments<br />

TCP/IP (LPD)<br />

This machine supports TCP/IP (LPD). The following describes the different connections<br />

in brief:<br />

■For Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me<br />

Using our TCP/IP Direct Print Utility, print data can be sent directly to a printer on<br />

the same network (Ethernet interface) without going through a server. TCP/IP<br />

Direct Print Utility is installed together with the printer driver.<br />

You will need to set up the IP address on the printer and the Windows 95,<br />

Windows 98, Windows Me computer.<br />

“2.2 TCP/IP (LPD)” (P. 28) for details on the settings.<br />

■For Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Mac OS X<br />

Using the LPR port for the OS, print data can be sent directly for printing. You will<br />

need to set up the IP address on the printer and the Windows NT 4.0, Windows<br />

2000, Windows XP, Mac OS X computer. Once the printer has registered on<br />

Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Mac OS X computer is shared,<br />

you can send data from Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me machine with<br />

shared printer for printing.<br />

“2.2 TCP/IP (LPD)” (P. 28) for details on the settings.


Internet printing<br />

1.1 <strong>Printer</strong> Environments<br />

This machine supports Internet Printing Protocol (IPP). As Windows 2000,<br />

Windows XP, Windows Me is installed with the client software (IPP port monitor)<br />

needed to print to a printer supporting IPP, you can specify the printer from the<br />

Add <strong>Printer</strong> Wizard. Using IPP, you can print to a remote printer through the<br />

Internet or intranet.<br />

NetWare<br />

“2.3 Using Internet Printing” (P. 30) for details on the settings.<br />

This machine can be used as a network OS in environment using Novell Net-<br />

Ware.<br />

“2.4 NetWare” (P. 32) for details on the settings.<br />

Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 1<br />

7


Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 1<br />

8<br />

1.1 <strong>Printer</strong> Environments<br />

EtherTalk (option)<br />

As this machine supports EtherTalk protocol, you can print from Macintosh.<br />

To print from Macintosh, you will need the PostScript Software Kit (option). See the PostScript Software<br />

Kit guide for details for using it.


Token Ring (option)<br />

1.1 <strong>Printer</strong> Environments<br />

This machine supports Token Ring. When installed with the optional interface<br />

board for Token Ring, you can use the printer in a network environment with Net-<br />

Ware or TCP/IP existing itself or together.<br />

When the interface board for Token Ring is installed, the Ethernet interface cannot be used. Also, the<br />

items which can be set will be different. See “2.4 NetWare” (P. 32) for details on the settings.<br />

Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 1<br />

9


Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 10<br />

1<br />

1.2<br />

Connecting Interface<br />

Cable<br />

Use the parallel interface to connect this machine to a host device directly. Use an Ethernet<br />

interface to connect to a network. You can also use the Token Ring (option) to make a connection.<br />

1.2.1 Connecting by Parallel Interface<br />

Procedure<br />

The following procedure describes how to connect with the parallel interface.<br />

To connect to a host device using parallel interface, you will need the parallel interface cable provided<br />

by our company as an optional product. For details on this optional product, see “Appendix B<br />

Optional Accessories” in “Part 3 Appendix” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier).<br />

1 Insert the interface cable connector to<br />

the parallel interface connector of this<br />

machine and secure it by the wire clips<br />

on both sides.<br />

2 Connect the other end of the interface<br />

cable connector to the host device.<br />

3 Turn on the power of the host device.<br />

4 Turn on the power of the machine.<br />

If necessary, you may select the following settings:<br />

● Port Status (Default: Enabled)<br />

● Print Mode (Default: Auto)<br />

● PJL (Default: Enabled)<br />

● Auto Eject Time (Default: 30 Seconds)<br />

● Adobe Communication Protocol (Default: Standard)<br />

● Bi-directional Communication (Default: Enabled)<br />

For details on the items to be set, see “5.6 Network Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong><br />

(Copier).<br />

● Adobe Communication Protocol can be set when the PostScript Software Kit (option) has been<br />

installed.


1.2 Connecting Interface Cable<br />

● Except for Bi-directional Communication, there is no need to change the default setting of the other<br />

items for normal use. However, it might be necessary to make changes depending on the OS of each<br />

host device.<br />

1.2.2 Connecting by Ethernet Interface<br />

Procedure<br />

The types of Ethernet interface supported are as follows:<br />

● 100Base-TX<br />

● 10Base-T<br />

By default, 100Base-TX and 10Base-T will be automatically interchanged.<br />

The following procedure describes how to connect with the Ethernet interface.<br />

1 Connect the interface cable to the<br />

Ethernet interface connector.<br />

Use only interface cable meant for the network connection<br />

in use. To replace network cable, contact our Customer<br />

Support Center.<br />

2 Turn on the power of the machine.<br />

1.2.3 Connecting by Token Ring Interface<br />

The types of Token Ring interface supported are as follows:<br />

● UTP<br />

● STP<br />

When the Token Ring interface board is installed, the Ethernet interface cannot be used.<br />

● To set up the Token Ring, you will need the Token Ring Installation kit besides the Token Ring<br />

interface board. The Token Ring Installation kit will be installed by our customer engineer. For<br />

more details, please contact our Customer Support Center.<br />

● When the Token Ring interface port is installed, the MAC address will be changed.<br />

● When using gateway in Token Ring environment, set Source Routing to On.<br />

Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 1<br />

11


Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 1<br />

12<br />

1.2 Connecting Interface Cable<br />

Procedure<br />

The following procedure describes how to connect by the Token Ring interface.<br />

1 Connect the Token Ring interface cable<br />

to the Token Ring interface connector.<br />

Do not connect the interface cable to the two Token Ring<br />

interface port connectors. This may cause poor transmission<br />

or breakdown.<br />

Use only interface cable meant for the network connection<br />

in use.<br />

2 Turn on the power of the machine.<br />

If necessary, set the following items on the printer control panel (Network/Port>):<br />

● IPX/SPX FrameType (Default: Auto)<br />

● Token Ring - Transmit Rate (Default: Auto)<br />

● Token Ring - Max Packet Size (Default: 1,500 Octet)<br />

● Token Ring - Source Routing (Default: Off)<br />

For normal use, there is no need to change the default settings of all the items.


1.3<br />

Setting IP Address<br />

This section describes how to set the IP address.<br />

Depending on the network environment, you may need to set the subnet mask and gateway<br />

address for the machine. If your network environment has a Reverse ARP Protocol (RARP),<br />

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) or BOOTP environment, you may obtain the<br />

address automatically from each of these servers.<br />

By default, these items will be obtained automatically from the DHCP server.<br />

To check if the address has been obtained from the DHCP, RARP or BOOTP servers, either<br />

carry out the procedure in “1.3.1 Setting IP Address” (P. 14) and then check the settings of<br />

the IP address, subnet mask and gateway address; or see “6.6 Printing Reports/Lists” in<br />

“Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) to print out the System Settings List and then<br />

under TCP/IP in Communication Settings, check the IP address, subnet mask and gateway<br />

address.<br />

If the address has not been obtained automatically or to set the settings manually, see<br />

“1.3.1 Setting IP Address” (P. 14) for details for setting the address. You may also change<br />

the way to obtain the address.<br />

● Use the DHCP server together with the Windows Internet Name Service (WINS) server. Check with your system<br />

administrator for any queries on the DHCP, WINS environments.<br />

● When using the BOOTP server, change Get IP Address to BOOTP. For details on the way to change, see “5.6<br />

Network Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier). Check with your system administrator for<br />

any queries on the BOOTP environment.<br />

You may set the method of obtaining an address by using either the System Administration<br />

Mode through the touch panel display or the CentreWare Internet Services.<br />

● For details on System Administration Mode, see “Chapter 5 System Administration Mode Settings” in “Part 1<br />

Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier).<br />

● For details on CentreWare Internet Services, see “Chapter 5 Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet<br />

Services)” (P. 105).<br />

Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 13<br />

1


Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 1<br />

14<br />

1.3 Setting IP Address<br />

1.3.1 Setting IP Address<br />

Procedure<br />

The following procedure describes how to set the IP address using the touch<br />

panel display.<br />

1 On the control panel, press Password/System Settings.<br />

Either the System Administrator Menu screen or System Administrator – Password Entry screen will<br />

be displayed.<br />

If the System Administrator Menu screen is displayed, proceed to step 2.<br />

System Administrator Menu<br />

If the System Administrator – Password Entry screen is displayed, see “5.2.1 Entering the System<br />

Administration Mode” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on entering the<br />

password.<br />

<br />

2 On the screen, select System Settings.<br />

System Administrator Menu<br />

The System Settings screen is displayed.<br />

<strong>User</strong> Mode System Settings<br />

<br />

<br />

<strong>User</strong> Mode System Settings


3 Select System Settings.<br />

System Settings<br />

System Settings<br />

Auditron<br />

Administration<br />

The System Settings screen is displayed.<br />

4 Select Network Settings.<br />

System Settings<br />

The Network Settings screen is displayed.<br />

5 Select Protocol Settings.<br />

Setup Menu<br />

The Protocol Settings screen is displayed.<br />

Close<br />

System Administrator<br />

Password<br />

Close<br />

Common Settings Copy Mode Settings Network Settings<br />

Print Mode Settings<br />

<br />

Scan Mode Settings<br />

<br />

<br />

1.3 Setting IP Address<br />

Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 1<br />

15


Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 1<br />

16<br />

1.3 Setting IP Address<br />

6 Select TCP/IP - Get IP Address and then Change Settings.<br />

The display of Current Settings of TCP/IP - IP Address, TCP/IP - Subnet Mask, TCP/IP - Gateway<br />

Address might differ according to your network environment used.<br />

Protocol Settings<br />

Items Current Settings<br />

1. Token Ring - Transmit Rate Auto<br />

2. Token Ring -Max Packet Size 1500 Octet<br />

3. Token Ring - Source Routing Off<br />

4. TCP/IP - Get IP Address DHCP<br />

5. TCP/IP - IP Address DHCP in Progress<br />

The TCP/IP - Get IP Address screen is displayed.<br />

7 Select Manual and then Save.<br />

When obtaining address from the BOOTP server, select the BOOTP Server button, followed by the<br />

Save button and then proceed to step 12.<br />

2. TCP/IP - Get IP Address<br />

DHCP<br />

BOOTP<br />

RARP<br />

Manual<br />

The Protocol Settings screen is displayed.<br />

8 Select TCP/IP - IP Address and then Change Settings.<br />

Protocol Settings<br />

Items Current Settings<br />

1. Token Ring - Transmit Rate Auto<br />

2. Token Ring -Max Packet Size 1500 Octet<br />

3. Token Ring - Source Routing Off<br />

4. TCP/IP - Get IP Address Manual<br />

5. TCP/IP - IP Address<br />

(Not Set)<br />

The TCP/IP - IP Address screen is displayed.<br />

1/2<br />

Cancel<br />

Close<br />

Change<br />

Settings<br />

Save<br />

IP Address, Subnet Mask and Gateway Address will<br />

be automatically extracted from the DHCP Server.<br />

Extraction begins when the Exit button is selected.<br />

1/2<br />

Close<br />

Change<br />

Settings


1.3 Setting IP Address<br />

9 Enter the IP address using the numeric keypad.<br />

Once three digits are entered, the cursor will move automatically to a next bit. To move to the next bit<br />

before three digits are entered, select the Next button.<br />

● Enter the address in a xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx format. xxx refer to the value between 0 to 255. However, the<br />

following address cannot be entered: 224 to 225.xxx.xxx.xxx and 127.xxx.xxx.xxx.<br />

● To correct a invalid entered value, press the C button on the control panel, and then re-enter.<br />

5. TCP/IP - IP Address<br />

. . .<br />

10 Select Save once you have entered the IP address.<br />

The Protocol Settings screen is displayed.<br />

11 If necessary, repeat steps 8 to 10 to set the subnet mask and gateway<br />

address.<br />

● The subnet mask and gateway address cannot be set if the IP address has not been entered.<br />

● Enter the IP address in a xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx format.<br />

● Enter the subnet mask using a combination of the following values: 0, 128, 192, 224, 248, 252, 255.<br />

However, 0 cannot be entered as one of the middle bits.<br />

● Enter the gateway address within the limit of 0 to 255. However, the following address cannot be<br />

entered: 224 to 225.xxx.xxx.xxx and 127.xxx.xxx.xxx.<br />

● When the gateway adress does not need to be set, enter “0.0.0.0”.<br />

12 Once you have entered the IP address, select Close repeatedly until<br />

the System Settings screen is displayed.<br />

13 Select Close.<br />

The machine will reboot and the display will return to the previous screen prior to this procedure.<br />

Next<br />

Cancel<br />

Save<br />

Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 1<br />

17


Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 18<br />

1<br />

1.4<br />

Setting Port<br />

This section describes the procedure on activating the port to be used for printing after the<br />

IP address has been set or checked.<br />

You can activate the port by using either the System Administration Mode through the touch<br />

panel display or CentreWare Internet Services.<br />

If the port has been used already in the Enabled state, the procedure in this section is not<br />

necessary. If the needed port is in the Disabled state, carry out the procedure.<br />

To check if the port is Enabled, either carry out the following procedure in “1.4.1 Activating<br />

Port” and then check the port status; or see “6.6 Printing Reports/Lists” in “Part 1 Hardware”<br />

of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) to print out the System Settings List and then check the item<br />

under Communication Settings.<br />

● “Chapter 5 System Administration Mode Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details<br />

on System Administration Mode and the ports that can be set.<br />

● “Chapter 5 Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)” (P. 105) for details on CentreWare<br />

Internet Services.<br />

1.4.1 Activating Port<br />

Procedure<br />

The following procedure describes how to set the LPD port to Enabled (default:<br />

Disabled) using the touch panel display.<br />

1 On the control panel, press Password/System Settings.<br />

Either the System Administrator Menu screen or System Administrator – Password Entry screen will<br />

be displayed.<br />

If the System Administrator Menu screen is displayed, proceed to step 2.<br />

System Administrator Menu<br />

<strong>User</strong> Mode System Settings


1.4 Setting Port<br />

If the System Administrator – Password Entry screen is displayed, see “5.2.1 Entering the System<br />

Administration Mode” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on entering the<br />

password.<br />

<br />

2 On the screen, select System Settings.<br />

System Administrator Menu<br />

The System Settings screen is displayed.<br />

3 Select System Settings.<br />

System Settings<br />

System Settings<br />

Auditron<br />

Administration<br />

<br />

The System Settings screen is displayed.<br />

4 Select Network Settings.<br />

System Settings<br />

The Network Settings screen is displayed.<br />

<br />

<strong>User</strong> Mode System Settings<br />

Setup Menu<br />

<br />

Close<br />

System Administrator<br />

Password<br />

Close<br />

Common Settings Copy Mode Settings Network Settings<br />

Print Mode Settings<br />

Scan Mode Settings<br />

Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 1<br />

19


Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 1<br />

20<br />

1.4 Setting Port<br />

5 Select Port Settings.<br />

<br />

<br />

The Port Settings screen is displayed.<br />

6 Check Current Settings for LPD.<br />

If it is Enabled, there is no need to do any setting.<br />

If it is Disabled, carry out the setting. If it is Enabled, proceed to step 12.<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

For the remaining steps, LPD is assumed to be Disabled in this example.<br />

7 Select LPD and then Change Settings.<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

The LPD screen is displayed.<br />

8 Select Port Status and then Change Settings.<br />

LPD<br />

Items Current Settings<br />

1. Port Status Disabled<br />

The LPD - Port Status screen is displayed.<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

Close<br />

Change<br />

Settings


9 Select Enable and then Save.<br />

1. LPD - Port Status<br />

Disable<br />

Enable<br />

The LPD screen is displayed.<br />

1.4 Setting Port<br />

To activate the LPD port, the IP address must be set. If the IP address has not been set, selecting the<br />

Enable button will display the TCP/IP - Get IP Address screen. For details on setting the IP address,<br />

see “1.3 Setting IP Address” (P. 13).<br />

10 Check that Current Settings for Port Status is Enabled and then select<br />

Close.<br />

LPD<br />

Items Current Settings<br />

1. Port Status Enabled<br />

The Port Settings screen is displayed.<br />

Cancel<br />

11 Repeat steps 6 to 9 to set SNMP to Enabled.<br />

If there are other ports needed for printing, repeat steps 7 to 10 to set their status to Enabled.<br />

12 Select Close repeatedly until the System Settings screen is displayed.<br />

13 Select Close.<br />

The machine will reboot and the display will return to the previous screen prior to this procedure.<br />

Save<br />

Close<br />

Change<br />

Settings<br />

Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 1<br />

21


Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 22<br />

1<br />

1.5<br />

Memory Allocation<br />

This section describes how to allocate memory.<br />

Depending on the use, you can allocate memory in this machine according to the memory<br />

types in the table. The memory types that can be allocated may be different according to the<br />

optional products installed.<br />

Print page buffer<br />

PCL memory<br />

*PS :with PostScript Software Kit installed<br />

Except for print page buffer, memory allocation of the other memory types can be done<br />

either through the touch panel display or CentreWare Internet Services. Memory allocation<br />

will change when power is on or system is reset.<br />

● “5.7.1 Allocate Memory” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on the capacity of each<br />

memory type, spool default values and the way of setting.<br />

● “Chapter 5 Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)” (P. 105) for details on CentreWare<br />

Internet Services.<br />

Print page buffer<br />

Memory Types Standard PS*<br />

PostScript memory ×<br />

Receive buffer<br />

This is the area for drawing the actual print image. The area to be allocated to<br />

print page buffer will be the remaining area after all other memory types have<br />

been allocated. As such, the capacity of print page buffer cannot be changed<br />

directly. The actual capacity allocated for print page buffer can be checked under<br />

Memory of the System Settings List. You can also use CentreWare Internet Services<br />

to check.<br />

To print high-resolution document, configure your settings to increase the capacity<br />

of the print page buffer.<br />

● “6.6 Printing Reports/Lists” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on printing<br />

the System Settings List.<br />

● “Chapter 5 Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)” (P. 105) for details on<br />

CentreWare Internet Services.<br />

When using the Page Print Mode of the PCL printer driver, you need to install at least 192 Mbyte of<br />

memory. See the on-line Help file for details on Print Page Mode.


PCL memory<br />

1.5 Memory Allocation<br />

This specifies the memory capacity to be used for the PCL5e. This memory is to<br />

store the interim data for creating the print image. By increasing the memory<br />

capacity, the printing speed may also be increased.<br />

PostScript memory<br />

This specifies the memory capacity to be used for PostScript. This item is displayed<br />

when the PostScript Software Kit (option) has been installed.<br />

Receive buffer<br />

This is the area for temporarily storing data received from the computer. A<br />

receive buffer is prepared for each port to enable receiving of data from multiple<br />

ports at the same time. The types of receive buffer are as follows:<br />

● Receive Buffer - Parallel<br />

● Receive Buffer - LPD Spool<br />

● Receive Buffer - NetWare<br />

● Receive Buffer - SMB Spool<br />

● Receive Buffer - IPP Spool<br />

● Receive Buffer - EtherTalk<br />

● Receive Buffer - Port 9100<br />

If the capacity of the receive buffer is increased, the processing of printing might<br />

be faster. Adjust the buffer capacity according to the print data volume. For ports<br />

that are not in use, it is recommended to disable them and allocate their memory<br />

for other uses.<br />

For LPD/SMB/IPP, you can specify spool processing. The default values are Off.<br />

The types of spool include Memory and Hard Disk. When Memory has been set,<br />

data exceeding the allocated capacity cannot be received. When this occurs, set<br />

it to Hard Disk.<br />

● To set EtherTalk, you will need the PostScript Software Kit (option).<br />

● For IPP, Memory cannot be set.<br />

■Setting Spool<br />

Spool mode<br />

This is the mode to save print data output from application program to the spool<br />

file in this machine temporarily for print processing. The spool file destination<br />

can be selected from the memory inside the machine or the internal hard disk.<br />

As the print data that has been spooled is processed in this machine, they will<br />

be released quickly by the application program. Processing from multiple computers<br />

can be done at the same time.<br />

Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 1<br />

23


Setting <strong>Printer</strong> Environment 1<br />

24<br />

1.5 Memory Allocation<br />

Non-spool mode<br />

This is the mode used to receive and process print data output from application<br />

program in this machine. If the machine is processing a print request from a<br />

computer, print request from other computers cannot be received.


2Setting up Network<br />

2.1 Windows Network (SMB) ................................................................. 26<br />

2.1.1 System Structure .............................................................. 26<br />

2.1.2 Setting Procedure............................................................. 27<br />

2.2 TCP/IP (LPD) ................................................................................... 28<br />

2.2.1 System Structure .............................................................. 28<br />

2.2.2 Setting Procedure............................................................. 29<br />

2.3 Using Internet Printing ..................................................................... 30<br />

2.3.1 System Structure .............................................................. 30<br />

2.3.2 Setting Procedure............................................................. 31<br />

2.4 NetWare ........................................................................................... 32<br />

2.4.1 System Structure .............................................................. 32<br />

2.4.2 Interface............................................................................ 32<br />

2.4.3 Setting Procedure............................................................. 33


Setting up Network<br />

2<br />

26<br />

2.1<br />

Windows Network (SMB)<br />

This section describes how to connect this machine to a Windows network using SMB.<br />

2.1.1 System Structure<br />

SMB is a protocol for sharing file or printer on Windows 95, Windows 98,<br />

Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, and Windows XP. Using SMB,<br />

print data or settings can be sent directly to a printer on the same network (Ethernet<br />

interface) without going through a server.<br />

You can begin printing by activating the SMB port on the machine, and then registering<br />

the printer on the network on each of the Windows 95, Windows 98,<br />

Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, and Windows XP OS.<br />

Depending on the network environment, you may need to set IP address, subnet<br />

mask and gateway address for the machine. Consult your network administrator<br />

for details on setting the needed item.<br />

● “1.3 Setting IP Address” (P. 13) for details on setting IP address.<br />

● The receiving of printing by IP address can be limited. For details, see “5.7 Print Mode Settings”<br />

in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier).


2.1.2 Setting Procedure<br />

Procedure<br />

The procedure is as follows:<br />

2.1 Windows Network (SMB)<br />

1 Configuring this machine:<br />

Using either the touch panel display or CentreWare Internet Services, set the<br />

port for SMB to Enabled (default: Disabled).<br />

● “1.4 Setting Port” (P. 18) for details on setting the port.<br />

● More detailed settings can be done by using CentreWare Internet Services. For details, see<br />

“Chapter 5 Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)” (P. 105).<br />

● By overwriting the config.txt files of this machine, the setting/changing of SMB can be done on the<br />

Windows computer.<br />

2 Configuring the computer:<br />

Install the printer driver.<br />

● When using NetBEUI as the transport protocol, check that the NetBEUI protocol has been installed<br />

on the host device. If not installed, see the manual of the OS used to install it.<br />

● When using TCP/IP as the transport protocol, check that the TCP/IP protocol has been installed on<br />

the host device. If not installed, see the manual of the OS used to install it. IP address is needed on<br />

both the host device and this machine.<br />

“3.4 Installing/Uninstalling the <strong>Printer</strong> Drivers” (P. 50) for details on how to install the printer<br />

driver.<br />

Setting up Network<br />

2<br />

27


Setting up Network<br />

2<br />

28<br />

2.2<br />

TCP/IP (LPD)<br />

This section describes how to connect the machine to Windows computer using TCP/IP<br />

(LPD).<br />

2.2.1 System Structure<br />

This machine supports TCP/IP (LPD). The following describes the different connections<br />

in brief:<br />

■For Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me<br />

Using our TCP/IP Direct Print Utility, print data can be sent directly to a printer on<br />

the same network (Ethernet interface) for printing without going through a server.<br />

TCP/IP Direct Print Utility is installed together with the printer driver.<br />

You will need to set the IP address on the machine and the Windows 95, Windows<br />

98, Windows Me computer.<br />

■For Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Mac OS X<br />

Print data can be sent directly and printed using the standard LPR port for OS<br />

(standard TCP/IP port for Windows 2000). You will need to set the IP address on<br />

the machine and the Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Mac OS X<br />

computer.<br />

Once the machine registered on Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP,<br />

Mac OS X computer is shared, you can also send data from Windows 95, Windows<br />

98, Windows Me machine to the shared machine for printing.<br />

The receiving of printing by IP address can be limited. For details, see “5.7 Print Mode Settings” in<br />

“Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier).


2.2.2 Setting Procedure<br />

Procedure<br />

The procedure is as follows:<br />

2.2 TCP/IP (LPD)<br />

1 Configuring this machine:<br />

Using either the touch panel display or CentreWare Internet Services, set the IP<br />

address and set the port for LPD to Enabled (default: Disabled).<br />

● “1.3 Setting IP Address” (P. 13) for details on setting IP address.<br />

● “1.4 Setting Port” (P. 18) for details on setting the port.<br />

● More detailed settings can be done by using CentreWare Internet Services. For details, see<br />

“Chapter 5 Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)” (P. 105).<br />

2 Configuring the computer:<br />

Install the printer driver.<br />

Before installing the printer driver, check the following items:<br />

■For Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me<br />

Is TCP/IP protocol installed? If not installed, see the manual of the OS used to install it.<br />

■For Windows NT 4.0<br />

Is TCP/IP protocol and Microsoft TCP/IP printing installed? If not installed, see the manual of<br />

Windows NT 4.0 to install it.<br />

■For Windows 2000, Windows XP<br />

Is Internet protocol (TCP/IP) installed? If not installed, see the manual of the OS used to install it.<br />

For details on how to install the printer driver, see“3.4 Installing/Uninstalling the <strong>Printer</strong> Drivers”<br />

(P. 50) for windows or see the PostScript software kit guide for Macintosh.<br />

Setting up Network<br />

2<br />

29


Setting up Network<br />

2<br />

30<br />

2.3<br />

Using Internet Printing<br />

This section describes how to use Internet printing from Windows 2000, Windows XP or<br />

Windows Me through Internet Printing Protocol (IPP).<br />

2.3.1 System Structure<br />

This machine supports IPP. As Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Me is<br />

installed with the client software (IPP port monitor) needed to print to a printer<br />

supporting IPP, you can specify the printer from the Add <strong>Printer</strong> Wizard. Using<br />

IPP, you can print to a remote printer through the Internet or intranet.<br />

You will need to set the IP address on the machine and the Windows Me, Windows<br />

2000, Windows XP computer.<br />

To use Internet printing on Windows Me, the IPP port must be installed. For details on installing the<br />

IPP port, see the manual of Windows Me.<br />

● Transport protocol<br />

TCP/IP<br />

● Target OS<br />

Microsoft Windows 2000 Server (with Service Pack 2)<br />

Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional (with Service Pack 2)<br />

Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition<br />

Microsoft Windows XP Professional Edition<br />

Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition


2.3.2 Setting Procedure<br />

Procedure<br />

The procedure is as follows:<br />

2.3 Using Internet Printing<br />

1 Configuring this machine:<br />

Using either the touch panel display or CentreWare Internet Services, set the IP<br />

address and the port for IPP to Enabled (default: Disabled).<br />

● “1.3 Setting IP Address” (P. 13) for details on setting IP address.<br />

● “1.4 Setting Port” (P. 18) for details on setting the port.<br />

● More detailed settings can be done by using CentreWare Internet Services. For details, see<br />

“Chapter 5 Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)” (P. 105).<br />

2 Configuring the computer:<br />

Set the print destination and install the printer driver.<br />

The Network Print Environment <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Network.pdf) in the PCL Driver/Network Utility<br />

(Windows ® ) CD-ROM for details.<br />

Setting up Network<br />

2<br />

31


Setting up Network<br />

2<br />

32<br />

2.4 NetWare<br />

This section describes how to connect the machine to a Novell NetWare-network.<br />

2.4.1 System Structure<br />

The system structure is as follows:<br />

As a network OS, this machine supports Novell NetWare (version 5.x, 6.x) and<br />

the printer server (PServer) mode only using binary and NDS.<br />

In the PServer mode, this machine will be the print server and will print jobs from<br />

the print queue. The created printer will use up one user license of the file server.<br />

You can print from the machine in an NDPS environment by using Novell NDPS Gateway. Before you<br />

start printing, set the machine to operate in a NetWare print environment, or start LPD. You need to<br />

set them as the Gateway destination when you set up the Novell NDPS Gateway. However, the<br />

attributes that can be acquired and set in NDPS are not supported.<br />

2.4.2 Interface<br />

■Supported interface<br />

● 100Base-TX<br />

● 10Base-T<br />

■Supported frame type<br />

● Ethernet II<br />

● IEEE802.3<br />

● IEEE802.3/IEEE802.2<br />

● IEEE802.3/IEEE802.2/SNAP<br />

This machine will send out packet of each frame type on the connected network,<br />

and automatically activate to the frame type that responded first.<br />

However, if other protocol exists together on the same network, use Ethernet II.


2.4 NetWare<br />

The network system kit (e.g. HUB) may not match the automatic setting of the frame type. If the data<br />

link indicator of the network system kit connected to this machine is not lighted, change the frame type<br />

setting of this machine to match the frame type of the file server. Use CentreWare Internet Services to<br />

do the setting and see “Chapter 5 Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)”<br />

(P. 105) for details.<br />

2.4.3 Setting Procedure<br />

Procedure<br />

The following procedure describes how to set up this machine by PServer mode<br />

to the network environment using NetWare.<br />

1 Checking host device name and network address:<br />

By referring to “6.6 Printing Reports/Lists” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong><br />

(Copier), print out the System Settings List and check the host device name and<br />

network address printed under the NetWare item.<br />

2 Configuring this machine:<br />

Set the NetWare port to Enabled on this machine beforehand.<br />

The Network Print Environment <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Network.pdf) in the PCL Driver/Network Utility<br />

(Windows ® ) CD-ROM for details.<br />

3 Configuring the computer:<br />

Install the printer driver supported by this machine to the computer. The printer<br />

driver varies according to the OS used.<br />

For the host device, use a personal computer that can function as a NetWare host device.<br />

The Network Print Environment <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Network.pdf) in the PCL Driver/Network Utility<br />

(Windows ® ) CD-ROM for details.<br />

Setting up Network<br />

2<br />

33


3Basic Printing<br />

3.1 Flow of Printing (Windows) .............................................................. 36<br />

3.2 About Paper ..................................................................................... 37<br />

3.2.1 Difference From Copying .................................................. 37<br />

3.2.2 Caution for Printing ........................................................... 37<br />

3.2.3 Paper Supply .................................................................... 38<br />

3.2.4 Outputting Paper............................................................... 39<br />

3.2.5 Loading Paper in Trays 1 to 4 ........................................... 39<br />

3.2.6 Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass Tray) ............................. 40<br />

3.2.7 Changing Paper Size of Paper Tray.................................. 45<br />

3.3 Printing Features.............................................................................. 46<br />

3.3.1 Before Printing .................................................................. 46<br />

3.3.2 Printing Procedure............................................................ 46<br />

3.3.3 Setting Printing Features .................................................. 47<br />

3.3.4 Using On-line Help............................................................ 49<br />

3.4 Installing/Uninstalling the <strong>Printer</strong> Drivers ......................................... 50<br />

3.4.1 For a Local <strong>Printer</strong> ............................................................ 50<br />

3.4.2 For a Network <strong>Printer</strong>........................................................ 53<br />

3.4.3 Uninstalling the <strong>Printer</strong> Drivers ......................................... 54<br />

3.5 Switching <strong>Printer</strong> Off-line ................................................................. 56<br />

3.6 Canceling Printing/Checking Job Status.......................................... 57<br />

3.6.1 Canceling Printing From Computer .................................. 57<br />

3.6.2 Canceling Printing From <strong>Printer</strong>........................................ 58<br />

3.6.3 Checking Job Status of Print Instruction........................... 60


Basic Printing<br />

3<br />

36<br />

3.1<br />

Flow of Printing (Windows)<br />

This section describes the basic flow of printing from Windows environment.<br />

(This may differ according to the client or system structure used.)<br />

Refer to the guide of the application program for details on the process.<br />

If necessary<br />

Set port<br />

Check the following before sending print data from the client:<br />

● Check the status of the port to be used in the System Administration Mode.<br />

“5.7 Print Mode Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on the<br />

process.<br />

Specify printing from application<br />

program.<br />

If necessary<br />

If necessary<br />

Activate application program used on the client.<br />

Refer to the guide of the application program for details on the process.<br />

Stop printing<br />

“3.6 Canceling Printing/Checking Job Status” (P. 57) for details on the process.<br />

Output<br />

“3.6 Canceling Printing/Checking Job Status” (P. 57) for details on the process.<br />

End


3.2<br />

About Paper<br />

This section describes the points to be note about the paper to be used for printing with the<br />

machine. Other than these, there is no difference on using paper for copying and printing.<br />

“2.1 Loading Paper” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on paper types suitable or<br />

unsuitable for copying and loading in each tray.<br />

3.2.1 Difference From Copying<br />

● When using tray 5 (Bypass Tray), there is a restriction on the orientation of<br />

loading paper.<br />

“3.2.6 Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass Tray)” (P. 40) for details on the orientation of loading<br />

paper and using tray 5 (Bypass Tray).<br />

3.2.2 Caution for Printing<br />

● If the paper size or type used for printing is different from the selection on the<br />

printer driver, or if the paper is loaded in an unsuitable paper tray, it may cause<br />

paper jam. In order to print correctly, select the correct paper size and type, as<br />

well as the paper tray.<br />

● When printing with 12 × 18" paper size, move the paper guide before loading<br />

the paper.<br />

“3.2.6 Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass Tray)” (P. 40) for details on how to print or move the<br />

paper guide.<br />

● When printing with non-standard paper sizes, you may need to customize the<br />

paper size on the printer driver.<br />

The On-line Help of the printer driver for details on customizing paper size.<br />

Basic Printing<br />

3<br />

37


Basic Printing<br />

3<br />

38<br />

3.2 About Paper<br />

3.2.3 Paper Supply<br />

This section describes supplying different paper types for use with this machine.<br />

When printing with plain paper, all paper trays can be used. The paper sizes that<br />

can be loaded depend on the paper trays.<br />

“2.1 Loading Paper” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on suitable paper<br />

sizes.<br />

When printing with non-standard paper sizes, even with the plain paper type, use<br />

tray 5 (Bypass Tray). You will need to customize the paper size on the printer<br />

driver in order to print.<br />

The On-line Help of the printer driver for details on customizing paper size and the method of printing.<br />

When printing with special paper, such as transparencies and heavyweight<br />

paper, use tray 5 (Bypass Tray). On the properties dialog box of the printer<br />

driver, be sure to select Tray 5 (Bypass) from the Paper Source menu on the<br />

Paper/Output tab, and then select the correct paper type from the Paper Type<br />

(Bypass Tray) menu.<br />

Automatic tray switching<br />

When a paper tray using plain paper runs out of paper during printing, it can be<br />

configured to switch automatically to another tray with the same paper size and<br />

orientation to continue printing.<br />

This Auto Tray Switch feature works only when Auto has been selected from the<br />

Paper Source menu on the Paper/Output tab.<br />

Auto Tray Switch can be individually set for each of paper trays 1 – 4. For trays<br />

loaded with paper type you do not use often, you may not want to include them<br />

as the target paper tray for tray switching.<br />

“5.4 Setting the System Settings (Common Settings)” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong><br />

(Copier) for details on how to configure this feature. You can also use CentreWare Internet Services<br />

to configure the settings. For details on CentreWare Internet Services, see “Chapter 5 Configuring<br />

From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)” (P. 105).<br />

This Auto Tray Switch feature is displayed as Disable Auto Tray Switch in the Common Menu and<br />

CentreWare Internet Services.<br />

Tray 5 (Bypass) cannot be used as the target tray for this Auto Tray Switch feature.<br />

By default, Auto Tray Switch is enabled.


3.2.4 Outputting Paper<br />

3.2 About Paper<br />

When the offset output tray or finisher has been installed, you can use Job Offset<br />

feature in addition to the usual way of outputting paper during printing.<br />

For the finisher, suitable paper sizes for the Job Offset feature are A3, B4, A4, A4 , B5 , 8K, 8×10",<br />

8.5×11", 8.5×11" , 8.5×13", 8.5×14", and 11×17".<br />

The various ways of outputting paper when the Job Offset feature is combined<br />

with the Collated feature of the printer driver are as follows:<br />

Example of printing three sets of a 3-page document<br />

Job Offset on<br />

Job Offset off<br />

The On-line Help of the printer driver for details on the Job Offset and Collated features.<br />

Output side of paper<br />

Collated Uncollated<br />

1 2<br />

3 4<br />

1 Printing will be done by set (in the sequence of pages 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 3)<br />

and then output offset from each set.<br />

2 Printing will be done by page number (in the sequence of pages 1, 1, 1, 2, 2, 2, 3, 3, 3)<br />

and then output offset from the previous print job.<br />

3 Printing will be done by set (in the sequence of pages 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 3)<br />

and then output without offset.<br />

4<br />

Printing will be done by page number (in the sequence of pages 1, 1, 1, 2, 2, 2, 3, 3, 3)<br />

and then output without offset.<br />

The paper is usually output with the printed side facing down. However, when<br />

output to the optional side output tray, the printed side will be facing up.<br />

3.2.5 Loading Paper in Trays 1 to 4<br />

For details on how to load paper, see “Chapter 2 Loading Paper” in “Part 1 Hardware”<br />

of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier).<br />

Basic Printing<br />

3<br />

39


Basic Printing<br />

3<br />

40<br />

3.2 About Paper<br />

3.2.6 Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass Tray)<br />

To print special paper such as transparencies, heavyweight and non-standard<br />

paper sizes that cannot be loaded in trays 1 - 4, use tray 5 (Bypass Tray).<br />

● Loading special paper such as transparencies, heavyweight, and non-standard paper sizes in trays<br />

1 - 4 may cause paper jam or machine breakdown.<br />

● Use only transparencies exclusively made for this machine. If not, it may cause paper jams or<br />

machine breakdown.<br />

● Use only lables exclusively made for this machine. If not, it may cause paper jams or machine<br />

breakdown.<br />

● You do not need to specify the paper size/type on the Tray 5 (Bypass) screen which is displayed on<br />

the control panel (touch panel display) when paper is loaded.<br />

The On-line Help of the printer driver for details on printing special papers like transparencies.<br />

When printing with tray 5 (Bypass Tray), be sure to select Tray 5 (Bypass) from<br />

the Paper Source menu on the Paper/Output tab, and then select the correct<br />

paper type from the Paper Type (Bypass Tray) menu on the printer driver<br />

screen.


3.2 About Paper<br />

The range of paper that can be used for tray 5 (Bypass Tray) is as follows:<br />

Paper Size<br />

Non-standard paper<br />

sizes* 3 :<br />

Short edge 100 – 305 mm<br />

Long edge 140 – 482.6 mm<br />

Standard paper sizes:<br />

A3, B4, A4, A4 * 5 ,<br />

B5, B5 * 5 , A5 * 5 , B6, A6,<br />

8K, 5.5×8.5”, 5.5×8.5” * 5 ,<br />

8.5×11", 8.5×11" * 5 ,<br />

8.5×13", 8.5×14", 11×17",<br />

12×18"* 4 , Custom 1-5<br />

Paper Weight<br />

G.S.M.* 1<br />

55 – 220<br />

g/m 2<br />

Ream<br />

Weight* 2<br />

47 – 189<br />

kg<br />

Paper Type<br />

Bond<br />

(64 – less than<br />

105 g/m2 )<br />

Plain<br />

(64 – less than<br />

105 g/m2 )<br />

Recycled<br />

(64 – less than<br />

105 g/m2 )<br />

Heavyweight 1 -<br />

Side 2<br />

(106 – 169 g/m2 )<br />

Heavyweight 2 -<br />

Side 2<br />

(170 – 220 g/m2 )<br />

Transparency* 6<br />

Lightweight<br />

(55 – 63 g/m2 )<br />

Labels<br />

Custom 1-5<br />

Loading<br />

Capacity<br />

Up to 10 mm;<br />

100 sheets<br />

(P paper)<br />

*1 G.S.M. is the weight of a sheet of paper with an area of one square meter.<br />

*2 Ream weight refers to the weight of 1,000 sheets of paper of size 788 × 1,091 mm.<br />

*3 When printing with non-standard paper sizes, you will need to customize the paper size<br />

on the printer driver. For details on customizing paper size, see the On-line Help of the<br />

printer driver.<br />

*4 When printing with 12×18" paper size, move the paper guide before loading the paper.<br />

For details on moving the paper guide, see “ Moving paper guide” (P. 44).<br />

*5 To set orientation, you need to configure the setting on the Configuration tab of the<br />

printer driver. For details, see the on-line Help of the printer driver.<br />

*6 For transparency, A4, A3, Letter and Ledger sizes can be used. Moreover, it is recommended<br />

to load in the portrait direction when loading transparencies in tray 5 (Bypass<br />

Tray).<br />

● If the paper size or type used for printing is different from the selection on the printer driver, it may<br />

cause paper jam. In order to print correctly, select the correct paper size and type, as well as the<br />

paper tray.<br />

● When outputting transparencies continuously, they might stick to each other. To prevent that,<br />

remove about 20 sheets from the output tray, and then fan well to lower the temperature.<br />

Basic Printing<br />

3<br />

41


Basic Printing<br />

3<br />

42<br />

3.2 About Paper<br />

Loading procedure<br />

Procedure<br />

Display the Paper/Output tab to configure the settings.<br />

Only for bond, plain paper, recycled and heavyweight, you can print on the<br />

reverse side of this paper that has been printed before.<br />

Use Wordpad of Windows 98 as an example. The procedure is same when using<br />

other OS.<br />

1 Open tray 5 (Bypass Tray).<br />

If necessary, pull out the extension tray. The extension<br />

tray can be pulled out in two stages.<br />

2 Check the position of the paper guide<br />

located in front of tray 5 (Bypass Tray).<br />

Set the paper guide to the Standard position for normal<br />

use.<br />

If the paper guide is at the 12" (305 mm) position, move<br />

it back to the Standard position. Also, for paper sizes<br />

with width exceeding that of A3 i.e. 297 mm (e.g. 12 ×<br />

18"), move the paper guide. For details on moving the<br />

paper guide, see “ Moving paper guide” (P. 44).


3 Insert paper with the side to be printed<br />

facing down, and push it right to the<br />

end while aligning it with the paper<br />

guide in front of you.<br />

● As settings can be done when printing from the computer,<br />

you do not need to specify the paper size/type<br />

on the Tray 5 (Bypass) screen which is displayed on<br />

the control panel (touch panel display) when paper is<br />

loaded.<br />

● Do not load different paper types together. It may<br />

cause paper jam.<br />

● Do not load paper exceeding the maximum fill line. It<br />

may cause paper jam or machine breakdown.<br />

● When printing heavyweight, curl the tip of the paper<br />

as shown on the right diagram if paper cannot be fed<br />

into the machine. However, if paper is too curled or<br />

creased, it may cause paper jams.<br />

Different paper sizes cannot be loaded at the same time.<br />

4 Adjust the paper size guide to fit the<br />

paper loaded.<br />

5 Select Print from the File menu.<br />

6 Check Name and then click Properties.<br />

3.2 About Paper<br />

Depending on the application program, the way to display the printer properties dialog box may differ.<br />

See the manual of the application program used.<br />

7 Click the Paper/Output tab.<br />

Basic Printing<br />

3<br />

43


Basic Printing<br />

3<br />

44<br />

3.2 About Paper<br />

8 From Paper Source, select Tray 5 (Bypass).<br />

9 Select the paper type from Paper Type (Bypass Tray).<br />

Here, we use plain paper as an example.<br />

When printing on the reverse side, select from Bond, Plain, Recycled, Heavyweight 1 (106-169 g/m2 )-<br />

Side 2, and Heavyweight 2 (170-220 g/m2 )-Side 2.<br />

10 Click OK.<br />

When outputting transparencies continuously, they may stick to each other. To prevent that, remove<br />

about 20 sheets from the output tray, and then fan well to lower the temperature.<br />

Moving paper guide<br />

When printing paper size with width exceeding that of A3 i.e. 297 mm (e.g.<br />

12×18"), move the paper guide to 12" (305 mm).<br />

When printing is done, be sure to move the paper guide back to the Standard position.


Procedure<br />

1 Slide the paper guide which is in front<br />

of tray 5 (Bypass Tray) to 12" (305<br />

mm).<br />

3.2.7 Changing Paper Size of Paper Tray<br />

3.2 About Paper<br />

For details on how to change the paper size, see “2.2 Changing the Size of<br />

Paper in Trays” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier).<br />

Also, the type of paper suitable for use depends on the paper tray. For details,<br />

see “2.1 Loading Paper” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier).<br />

Basic Printing<br />

3<br />

45


Basic Printing<br />

3<br />

46<br />

3.3<br />

This section describes printing features.<br />

3.3.1 Before Printing<br />

Printing Features<br />

In order to print from the computer, install the printer driver on the computer.<br />

<strong>Printer</strong> driver is a software which converts print data or instructions from the<br />

computer into data that can be understood by the printer.<br />

For details on how to install the printer driver, see “3.4 Installing/Uninstalling the<br />

<strong>Printer</strong> Drivers” (P. 50).<br />

● When using the Auditron feature, printing cannot be done if the user name and password of the<br />

machine are not correctly set at Specify Job Owner on the Configuration tab of the printer properties<br />

dialog box. For details on the settings of Specify Job Owner, see the on-line Help of the printer<br />

driver. For details on the Auditron feature, see “Chapter 6 Managing Totals and Outputting<br />

Reports” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier).<br />

● For details on direct printing of TIFF images, see the Network Print Environment <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong><br />

(Network.pdf) in the PCL Driver/Network Utility (Windows ® ) CD-ROM.<br />

3.3.2 Printing Procedure<br />

Procedure<br />

Printing procedure differs according to the application program used. For details,<br />

see the guide of your application program.<br />

This describes Wordpad which is included in Windows 95, Windows 98,<br />

Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000 and Windows XP as an example.<br />

1 Activate Wordpad and create a print data.<br />

2 Select Print from the File menu.<br />

The Print dialog box is displayed.


3 Check Name and then click Properties if necessary.<br />

The printer properties dialog box appears.<br />

4 Select the options.<br />

5 Click OK.<br />

6 Click OK from the Print dialog box.<br />

Printing will start.<br />

3.3.3 Setting Printing Features<br />

3.3 Printing Features<br />

Almost all printing features are set on the printer properties dialog box which<br />

appears when either printing from the application program or selecting Properties<br />

from the menu of the printer icon.<br />

From this displayed properties dialog box, select the features in each tab.<br />

The On-line Help of the printer driver for details on the options of the printer driver and the way of<br />

selecting the options. For details on using the On-line Help, see “3.3.4 Using On-line Help” (P. 49) .<br />

Basic Printing<br />

3<br />

47


Basic Printing<br />

3<br />

48<br />

3.3 Printing Features<br />

■When displayed from application program<br />

■When displayed from menu of the printer icon<br />

● For Windows NT 4.0, select options from the tabs that are displayed by selecting Document<br />

Defaults and Properties from the menu of the printer icon.<br />

● For Windows 2000 and Windows XP, select options from the tabs that are displayed by selecting<br />

Printing Preferences and Properties from the menu of the printer icon.<br />

● For Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000 and Windows XP, options are also displayed on the<br />

Color Management tab.<br />

Tab<br />

Tab


3.3.4 Using On-line Help<br />

3.3 Printing Features<br />

Explanation of the printer driver options and the basic printing process are found<br />

in the On-line Help.<br />

To view explanation of each option<br />

On the active properties dialog box of the printer driver, click the button on<br />

the top of the right corner of the window, and after the cursor has changed to<br />

click on the desired option.<br />

,<br />

To view basic process of printing<br />

On the active properties dialog box of the printer driver, click the Help button on<br />

the bottom right corner of the window to display a Help window which explains<br />

the displayed screen. Click the Contents button at the top left corner of the Help<br />

window to display a contents of the printing process.<br />

By double-clicking the title of the desired process, you will see the explanation.<br />

You can select Help when the tab unique to PCL printer driver is displayed.<br />

Basic Printing<br />

3<br />

49


Basic Printing<br />

3<br />

50<br />

3.4<br />

Installing/Uninstalling the<br />

<strong>Printer</strong> Drivers<br />

This section describes the procedure for installing and uninstalling the printer drivers.<br />

Two methods of installation are described here, one for a local printer and the other for a<br />

network printer.<br />

If you have installed an earlier version of the printer driver, uninstall it first by following the<br />

procedure in “3.4.3 Uninstalling the <strong>Printer</strong> Drivers” (P. 54) before installing the new version.<br />

3.4.1 For a Local <strong>Printer</strong><br />

Procedure<br />

Local printer refers to a printer that is directly connected to your computer.<br />

1 Start Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0,<br />

Windows 2000 or Windows XP.<br />

For this example, we will install the C400 PCL 6 printer driver on the Windows 98 OS.<br />

2 Click Start, point to Settings, and click <strong>Printer</strong>s.<br />

3 In the <strong>Printer</strong>s window, double-click Add <strong>Printer</strong>.<br />

4 Click Next.


5 Select Local printer and click Next.<br />

3.4 Installing/Uninstalling the <strong>Printer</strong> Drivers<br />

6 Insert the PCL Driver/Network Utility (Windows ® ) CD-ROM in your CD-<br />

ROM drive.<br />

7 Click Have Disk.<br />

The Install From Disk dialog box appears.<br />

8 Enter “Drive Name:\English\DC_C400\Win98_Me\PCL6” in the “Copy<br />

manufacturer’s files from:” box and click OK.<br />

In this guide, we have used “E:” as the CD-ROM drive. If you are using<br />

a different drive for the CD-ROM, specify accordingly.<br />

● Click the Browse button to specify a folder in the CD-ROM.<br />

● Enter “DC_C320” instead of “DC_C400” if you are installing the C320 printer driver.<br />

● Enter “DC_C240” instead of “DC_C400” if you are installing the C240 printer driver.<br />

Basic Printing<br />

3<br />

51


Basic Printing<br />

3<br />

52<br />

3.4 Installing/Uninstalling the <strong>Printer</strong> Drivers<br />

9 Select your printer model from the <strong>Printer</strong>s list and click Next.<br />

10 Select the port that you are using and click Next.<br />

11 Type a name for the printer, specify whether you want to use the printer<br />

as the default printer, then click Next.


3.4 Installing/Uninstalling the <strong>Printer</strong> Drivers<br />

12 Specify whether you want to print a test page, then click Finish.<br />

Installation begins.<br />

3.4.2 For a Network <strong>Printer</strong><br />

Procedure<br />

Network printer refers to a printer that is connected to your computer through a<br />

network.<br />

1 Follow steps 1 to 4 of “3.4.1 For a Local <strong>Printer</strong>” (P. 50). Select Network<br />

printer instead of Local printer to share this machine on the network<br />

and then click Next.<br />

Basic Printing<br />

3<br />

53


Basic Printing<br />

3<br />

54<br />

3.4 Installing/Uninstalling the <strong>Printer</strong> Drivers<br />

2 Specify the path to the machine in the “Network path or gueue name:”<br />

box and click Next.<br />

● Click the Browse button to specify the network path of the machine.<br />

● If you do not know the network address of the network printer, contact with your system administrator.<br />

3 Follow steps 11 to 12 of “3.4.1 For a Local <strong>Printer</strong>” (P. 50) to complete<br />

the installation procedure.<br />

3.4.3 Uninstalling the <strong>Printer</strong> Drivers<br />

Procedure<br />

To uninstall the alternate drivers downloaded using the Add <strong>Printer</strong> Wizard dialog box at the client<br />

computer, open the <strong>Printer</strong>s window and erase the applicable printer icons.<br />

1 Click Start, point to Settings, and click <strong>Printer</strong>s.<br />

For this example, we will uninstall the C400 PCL 6 driver on the Windows 98 OS.<br />

2 Select the printer icon.<br />

3 Select Delete from the File menu.


■For Windows 95/98, Me, and Windows NT<br />

4 In the <strong>Printer</strong>s dialog box, click Yes.<br />

5 Click Yes.<br />

3.4 Installing/Uninstalling the <strong>Printer</strong> Drivers<br />

■For Windows 2000/XP<br />

4 Select Server Properties from the File menu.<br />

5 Click the Driver tab.<br />

6 Select the printer driver you want to remove and click Remove.<br />

7 Click Yes.<br />

8 Restart the OS.<br />

Basic Printing<br />

3<br />

55


Basic Printing<br />

3<br />

56<br />

3.5<br />

Switching <strong>Printer</strong> Off-line<br />

When the machine is switched to off-line, it cannot receive data. Data being received will be<br />

interrupted and will not be printed.<br />

Procedure<br />

1 On the control panel, press Machine Status.<br />

The Machine Status screen is displayed.<br />

2 On the screen, select Print Mode.<br />

<br />

The Print Mode screen is displayed.<br />

3 Select Off-line.<br />

Print Mode<br />

4 Select Close.<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

Off-line<br />

On-line<br />

Close<br />

PCL Emulation HP-GL2 Emulation


3.6<br />

Canceling Printing/<br />

Checking Job Status<br />

To cancel printing, delete the print instruction on the computer first. If the print instruction<br />

cannot be deleted from the computer, delete it from this machine.<br />

You can check the status of print jobs from the computer.<br />

This section describes the different processes.<br />

3.6.1 Canceling Printing From Computer<br />

This section explains how to canceling print instructions from the computer.<br />

Canceling from Windows<br />

Procedure<br />

The procedure to cancel print instruction from Windows is as follows:<br />

1 From the Start menu, select Settings and then click <strong>Printer</strong>s.<br />

2 Open the icon of the printer model.<br />

3 In the windows displayed, click any document name and then press<br />

Delete on the keyboard.<br />

Canceling from CentreWare Internet Services<br />

You can use CentreWare Internet Services to cancel printing from the computer.<br />

For details on CentreWare Internet Services, see “Chapter 5 Configuring From<br />

Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)” (P. 105).<br />

Basic Printing<br />

3<br />

57


Basic Printing<br />

3<br />

58<br />

3.6 Canceling Printing/Checking Job Status<br />

3.6.2 Canceling Printing From <strong>Printer</strong><br />

The process to cancel printing from this machine is as follows:<br />

Canceling jobs in process<br />

Procedure<br />

If neither of the following two screens is displayed, see the procedure on the next<br />

page, “ Canceling jobs inside the machine” (P. 59).<br />

1 Either press Stop on the control panel or select Stop on the following<br />

screen.<br />

The job processing will be discontinued.<br />

Canceling jobs in the midst of printing<br />

Procedure<br />

Processing data...<br />

Print Job :Doc. No. 00456<br />

: akira. endo<br />

: Host1<br />

: document<br />

1 Either press Stop on the control panel or select Stop on the following<br />

screen.<br />

Printing in progress...<br />

Print Job :Doc. No. 00456<br />

: akira. endo<br />

: Host1<br />

: document<br />

Quantity : 2 / 4<br />

Pages : 2 / 10<br />

Center Output Tray<br />

The machine will pause and display the following screen.<br />

Stop<br />

Stop<br />

Close<br />

Close


3.6 Canceling Printing/Checking Job Status<br />

2 To stop printing, either press C on the control panel or select Stop on<br />

the following screen. However, the page in the midst of printing will be<br />

printed.<br />

To continue printing, either press the Start button on the control panel or select the Start button on the<br />

screen.<br />

Canceling jobs inside the machine<br />

Procedure<br />

Ready to print.<br />

Touch Start to resume printing or Stop to cancel the job.<br />

Print Job :Doc. No. 00456<br />

: akira. endo<br />

: Host1<br />

: document<br />

Quantity : 2 / 4<br />

Pages : 2 / 10<br />

Center Output Tray<br />

The process to cancel print jobs received by the machine is as follows. Through<br />

this procedure, you can interrupt the receiving of data and empty the buffer.<br />

Buffer is the location to store data sent from the client.<br />

You can also execute and print all jobs in the machine. For details, see “7.2.8 Forcibly Outputting<br />

Data Wait Documents” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier).<br />

1 On the control panel, press Job Status.<br />

The Job Status screen is displayed.<br />

2 On the screen, select Current and Pending Jobs.<br />

A list of jobs in process or waiting will be displayed.<br />

Stop<br />

Start<br />

Close<br />

Job Status<br />

Current and<br />

Pending Jobs<br />

Completed Jobs<br />

Stored<br />

Documents<br />

Print<br />

Waiting Jobs<br />

Doc. No. - Job Type Status Remote Terminal/Contents Pages<br />

00117-Copy Job Copying A4 : 100% 25/100<br />

00010-Print Job Print Wait <strong>Fuji</strong> Taro : MDG 0/120<br />

00015-Print Job Print Wait <strong>Fuji</strong> Taro : MDG 0/50<br />

Basic Printing<br />

3<br />

59


Basic Printing<br />

3<br />

60<br />

3.6 Canceling Printing/Checking Job Status<br />

3 Select the job that you want to delete.<br />

The job status will be displayed.<br />

4 Select Stop.<br />

The job processing will be discontinued.<br />

5 Select Close.<br />

Repeat steps 2 to 5 if you have other jobs to delete.<br />

3.6.3 Checking Job Status of Print Instruction<br />

The procedure to check the job status of print instruction is as follows:<br />

Using Windows<br />

Procedure<br />

Job Status<br />

Current and<br />

Pending Jobs<br />

Completed Jobs<br />

Stored<br />

Documents<br />

Doc. No. - Job Type Status Remote Terminal/Contents Pages<br />

00117-Copy Job Copying A4 : 100% 25/100<br />

00010-Print Job Print Wait <strong>Fuji</strong> Taro : MDG 0/120<br />

00015-Print Job Print Wait <strong>Fuji</strong> Taro : MDG 0/50<br />

: <strong>Fuji</strong> Taro<br />

: (CentreWare)<br />

: document<br />

Quantity :<br />

Pages :<br />

2 A4<br />

1 Sided<br />

Center Output Tray<br />

0/5<br />

120/120<br />

Print<br />

Waiting Jobs<br />

Print Job :Doc. No. 00010 Close<br />

1 From the Start menu, select Settings and then click <strong>Printer</strong>s.<br />

2 Open the icon of the printer model.<br />

Stop<br />

Promote Job


3 Check Status in the displayed window.<br />

Using CentreWare Internet Services<br />

3.6 Canceling Printing/Checking Job Status<br />

You can also use CentreWare Internet Services to check job status of print<br />

instruction in the machine.<br />

For details on CentreWare Internet Services, see “Chapter 5 Configuring From<br />

Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)” (P. 105).<br />

Using <strong>Printer</strong><br />

Procedure<br />

1 On the control panel, press Job Status.<br />

The Job Status screen is displayed.<br />

2 On the screen, select either Current and Pending Jobs or Completed<br />

Jobs.<br />

Job Status<br />

Current and<br />

Pending Jobs<br />

A list of jobs will be displayed.<br />

Completed Jobs<br />

Stored<br />

Documents<br />

Secure Print Sample Print Delayed Print<br />

Private Mailbox<br />

Basic Printing<br />

3<br />

61


Basic Printing<br />

3<br />

62<br />

3.6 Canceling Printing/Checking Job Status<br />

3 Check the job status.<br />

Job Status<br />

Current and<br />

Pending Jobs<br />

Completed Jobs<br />

Stored<br />

Documents<br />

Doc. No. - Job Type Status Remote Terminal/Contents Pages<br />

00117-Copy Job Copying A4 : 100% 25/100<br />

00010-Print Job Print Wait <strong>Fuji</strong> Taro : MDG 0/120<br />

00015-Print Job Print Wait <strong>Fuji</strong> Taro : MDG 0/50<br />

Print<br />

Waiting Jobs<br />

For example, if a job in waiting is selected, the following screen will be displayed.<br />

Print Job :Doc. No. 00010 Close<br />

: <strong>Fuji</strong> Taro<br />

: (CentreWare)<br />

: document<br />

Quantity :<br />

Pages<br />

2 A4<br />

1 Sided<br />

Center Output Tray<br />

:<br />

0 / 5<br />

100 /120<br />

4 After checking, press Features on the control panel.<br />

Stop<br />

Promote Job


4Special Printing<br />

4.1 Printing Special Papers.................................................................... 64<br />

4.2 Printing Non-Standard Paper Size................................................... 66<br />

4.2.1 Customizing Non-Standard Paper Size ............................ 66<br />

4.2.2 Printing Non-Standard Paper Size.................................... 68<br />

4.3 Secure Print ..................................................................................... 70<br />

4.3.1 Setting Secure Print Jobs ................................................. 70<br />

4.3.2 Printing Secure Print Jobs ................................................ 72<br />

4.4 Sample Print .................................................................................... 77<br />

4.4.1 Setting Sample Print Jobs ................................................ 77<br />

4.4.2 Printing Sample Print Jobs ............................................... 78<br />

4.5 Delayed Print.................................................................................... 83<br />

4.5.1 Setting Delayed Print Jobs ............................................... 83<br />

4.5.2 Printing Delayed Print Jobs .............................................. 85<br />

4.6 Expanding Print Areas for Printing................................................... 89<br />

4.7 E-mail Printing.................................................................................. 91<br />

4.7.1 System Environment......................................................... 91<br />

4.7.2 Sending E-mail ................................................................. 95<br />

4.8 Notify Job End by E-mail.................................................................. 97<br />

4.8.1 System Environment......................................................... 97<br />

4.8.2 Notifying by E-mail............................................................ 99<br />

4.9 Adding Banner Sheet for Printing .................................................. 101<br />

4.10 File Upload Printing........................................................................ 102


Special Printing<br />

4<br />

64<br />

4.1<br />

Printing Special Papers<br />

This section describes how to print special papers. The following special papers can be<br />

printed:<br />

● Heavyweight 1 (106-169 g/m 2 )<br />

● Heavyweight 1 (106-169 g/m 2 ) – Side 2<br />

● Heavyweight 2 (170-220 g/m 2 )<br />

● Heavyweight 2 (170-220 g/m 2 ) – Side 2<br />

● Transparency<br />

● Lightweight (55-63 g/m 2 )<br />

● Labels<br />

● Custom 1-5<br />

Use tray 5 (Bypass Tray) when printing these special papers.<br />

Display the Paper/Output tab to configure these paper supply settings.<br />

This will describe Wordpad of Windows 98 as an example. The procedure is the same when<br />

using other OS.<br />

● When outputting transparencies continuously, they may stick to each other. To prevent this, remove about 20<br />

sheets from the output tray, and then fan well to lower the temperature.<br />

● Use only labels exclusively made for this machine. If not, it may cause paper jams or machine breakdown.<br />

● Depending on the application program, the way to display the printer properties dialog box might differ. See the<br />

manual of the application program used.<br />

● When loading transparencies in tray 5 (Bypass Tray), you are recommended to load in the portrait orientation.<br />

● For details on using tray 5 (Bypass Tray), see “3.2.6 Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass Tray)” (P. 40).<br />

“2.1 Loading Paper” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on paper types suitable or<br />

unsuitable for copying and loading in each tray.<br />

Procedure<br />

1 Load special paper in tray 5 (Bypass Tray).<br />

2 Select Print from the File menu.<br />

3 Check Name and then click Properties.<br />

4 Click the Paper/Output tab.


4.1 Printing Special Papers<br />

5 From the Paper Source drop-down list box, select Tray 5 (Bypass).<br />

6 Select the paper type from the Paper Type drop-down list box.<br />

7 Click OK to start printing.<br />

● When outputting transparencies continuously, they may stick to each other. To prevent this, remove<br />

about 20 sheets from the output tray, and then fan well to lower the temperature.<br />

● Use only labels exclusively made for this machine. If not, it may cause paper jams or machine<br />

breakdown.<br />

5<br />

6<br />

Special Printing<br />

4<br />

65


Special Printing<br />

4<br />

66<br />

4.2<br />

Printing Non-Standard<br />

Paper Size<br />

This section describes how to print non-standard paper size. To print non-standard paper<br />

size, you have to customize the paper size on the printer driver first.<br />

Once the non-standard paper size has been customized, you can select it from Paper Size<br />

and Output Size on the Paper/Output tab. Use tray 5 (Bypass Tray) for printing.<br />

You can customize up to five paper sizes with a separate name for each size. For sizes in<br />

millimeters, you can enter in units of 0.1 mm and between 100.0 – 305.0 mm for the short<br />

edge, 140.0 – 482.6 mm for the long edge; and for sizes in inches, in units of 0.01 inch and<br />

between 3.94 – 12.01 inch for the short edge, 5.51 – 19.00 inch for the long edge.<br />

For the name of the customized size, you can enter up to 14 characters.<br />

For Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, only Administrators can change the setting. All other users can<br />

only check the contents.<br />

As local printer uses the client’s form database, configuring settings on the Custom Paper Size dialog box on<br />

Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP will affect other printers of the client. For network printer, using<br />

form database of the server with print queue will also affect the shared printer on the same network of other clients.<br />

For Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, defining customized paper sizes for each printer icon will not affect<br />

settings of other printer on the client. For network printer, defining customized paper sizes for each printer icon will<br />

also not affect the shared printer on the same network of other clients.<br />

4.2.1 Customizing Non-Standard Paper Size<br />

Procedure<br />

Customize non-standard paper size on the Custom Paper Size dialog box.<br />

1 From the Start menu, select Settings and then click <strong>Printer</strong>s to display<br />

the printer properties dialog box.<br />

2 Click the Configuration tab.


3 Click Custom Paper Size.<br />

The Custom Paper Size dialog box is displayed.<br />

4 Select the desired paper size from the Details list box.<br />

4.2 Printing Non-Standard Paper Size<br />

5 In the Change Setting For group, specify Short Edge and Long Edge.<br />

You can either enter the value with keyboard or use the buttons on the screen.<br />

Short Edge cannot be longer than Long Edge. Conversely, Long Edge cannot be shorter than Short<br />

Edge.<br />

6 To name the paper size, check the Name the Paper Size check box,<br />

and then enter the name at Name.<br />

You can enter up to 14 characters for the name.<br />

7 If necessary, repeat steps 4 to 6 to set the paper size.<br />

8 Click OK.<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

3<br />

Special Printing<br />

4<br />

67


Special Printing<br />

4<br />

68<br />

4.2 Printing Non-Standard Paper Size<br />

9 Click OK on the Configuration tab.<br />

4.2.2 Printing Non-Standard Paper Size<br />

Procedure<br />

The procedure to print non-standard paper size is as follows. Use tray 5 (Bypass<br />

Tray) for printing.<br />

“3.2.6 Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass Tray)” (P. 40) for details on using tray 5 (Bypass Tray).<br />

Here, we use Wordpad of Windows 98 as an example. The procedure is the<br />

same when using other OS.<br />

Depending on the application program, the way to display the printer properties dialog box might differ.<br />

See the manual of the application program used.<br />

1 Load the non-standard paper size in tray 5 (Bypass Tray).<br />

2 Select Print from the File menu.<br />

3 Check Name and then click Properties.<br />

4 Click the Paper/Output tab.


4.2 Printing Non-Standard Paper Size<br />

5 From the Paper Source drop-down list box, select Tray 5 (Bypass).<br />

6 Select the paper type from the Paper Type drop-down list box.<br />

7 From the Output Size drop-down list box, select the needed non-standard<br />

paper size.<br />

8 Click OK to start printing.<br />

6 5<br />

7<br />

Special Printing<br />

4<br />

69


Special Printing<br />

4<br />

70<br />

4.3<br />

Secure Print<br />

You can add a password to your print data on the computer, send it to the machine for temporary<br />

storing; and then print out the data using the control panel on the machine. This feature<br />

is known as Secure Print. You can also save print data in the machine without a<br />

password and print frequently-used data directly from the machine without having to send<br />

print instruction from the client.<br />

You need to set the user name and password before printing.<br />

Up to 200 users and 1,000 files per user can be set. You can save up to 9,999 files or until<br />

the hard disk is full.<br />

4.3.1 Setting Secure Print Jobs<br />

Procedure<br />

To use the Secure Print feature, you need to set the user name and password.<br />

1 From the Start menu, select Settings and then click <strong>Printer</strong>s to display<br />

the printer properties dialog box.<br />

2 Click the Paper/Output tab.


3 Select Secure Print from the Job Type drop-down list box.<br />

The Secure Print Settings dialog box appears.<br />

4.3 Secure Print<br />

4 Enter the user ID within 24 characters at the Secure/Sample Print <strong>User</strong><br />

ID text box.<br />

The user ID entered here will be displayed as the user ID on the Secure Print screen on the touch panel<br />

display of the machine. You can register the same user ID more than once if it is used with different<br />

passwords.<br />

5 When password is set, enter a password of four-digits of less in the<br />

Password text box and the Confirm Password text box.<br />

6 Click OK.<br />

3<br />

Special Printing<br />

4<br />

71


Special Printing<br />

4<br />

72<br />

4.3 Secure Print<br />

4.3.2 Printing Secure Print Jobs<br />

This section describes how to print Secure Print jobs.<br />

First, set and send the Secure Print job at the client. Then, execute the print<br />

instruction at the machine to print out the data.<br />

You can also check or delete print jobs saved in the machine using the same<br />

procedure of executing print instruction at the machine.<br />

At the computer<br />

Procedure<br />

Here, we use Wordpad of Windows 98 as an example. The procedure is the<br />

same when using other OS.<br />

Depending on the application program, the way to display the printer properties dialog box might differ.<br />

See the manual of the application program used.<br />

1 Select Print from the File menu.<br />

2 Check Name and then click Properties.<br />

3 Click the Paper/Output tab and select Secure Print from the Job Type<br />

drop-down list box.<br />

The Secure Print Settings dialog box is displayed.<br />

If necessary, click the Secure Print button and change the settings.<br />

4


4 Confirm the <strong>User</strong> ID and Password.<br />

4.3 Secure Print<br />

5 From Retrieve Document drop-down list box,select either Enter Document<br />

Name or Auto Retrieve.<br />

If Enter Document Name has been selected, enter the name within 24 characters at the Document<br />

Name text box.<br />

For either of the two options of specifying the document name, only the first 24 characters will be recognized<br />

if more than that are entered.<br />

The document name entered here will be displayed as the document name on the Secure Print screen<br />

on the touch panel display of the machine.<br />

6 Click OK.<br />

7 Click OK on the Paper/Output tab to carry out printing.<br />

At the machine<br />

Procedure<br />

This section describes the procedure to output print data stored inside the<br />

machine.<br />

1 On the control panel, press Job Status.<br />

The Job Status screen is displayed.<br />

4<br />

5<br />

Special Printing<br />

4<br />

73


Special Printing<br />

4<br />

74<br />

4.3 Secure Print<br />

2 On the screen, select Stored Documents and then Secure Print.<br />

Job Status<br />

Current and<br />

Pending Jobs<br />

Completed Jobs<br />

Stored<br />

Documents<br />

Secure Print Sample Print Delayed Print<br />

Private Mailbox<br />

The Secure Print screen is displayed and the user ID specified on the printer driver will be displayed.<br />

3 Select the user ID which you want to check, followed by Document<br />

List.<br />

Selecting the button will display the previous screen and the button the next screen. Or using<br />

the numeric keypad on the control panel, you can also enter the ID number at Go to to specify the<br />

required ID directly.<br />

Once the user ID has been selected, the saved number will be displayed at No. of Docs. on the bottom<br />

right of the screen.<br />

Secure Print<br />

001 <strong>Fuji</strong> Taro 002 <strong>Fuji</strong> Hanako<br />

003 Endo<br />

004 Imai<br />

005 Fukada<br />

006 Motohashi<br />

Refresh<br />

Go to<br />

(001-200)<br />

Document List<br />

● Selecting the Refresh button will display the latest information.<br />

● If the password has been set, the screen to enter the password will appear. Enter the password set<br />

on the printer driver and then select the Confirm button.<br />

● If you have forgotten the password, you can display the document saved in the System Administration<br />

Mode. For details on System Administration Mode, see “Chapter 5 System Administration<br />

Mode Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier).<br />

Close


4.3 Secure Print<br />

4 In the password entry screen, enter the same password as the one<br />

entered in the printer driver, then click Confirm.<br />

<strong>Fuji</strong> Taro<br />

Password<br />

The information of the document saved in the specified user ID will be displayed under Document<br />

Name, Stored Date and Pages. The name displayed in Document Name will be the document name set<br />

on the printer driver.<br />

5 Select the document to be printed, followed by Print.<br />

Selecting the Select All button will select all the documents. Selecting it again to deselect. To delete<br />

document, select the document, followed by the Delete button.<br />

A screen for confirmation will be displayed.<br />

Confirm<br />

Cancel<br />

<strong>Fuji</strong> Taro<br />

Refresh<br />

Close<br />

No. Document Name Stored Date Pages No.of Docs. : 2<br />

1 Secure Print<br />

2001/10/7 8:10 AM 22<br />

2 Dialog SOD<br />

2001/10/8 7:30 PM 5<br />

Select All<br />

6 Check the contents displayed on the screen and then make the necessary<br />

selection.<br />

■If Print is selected:<br />

Selecting the Cancel button will return you to the screen from step 4.<br />

<strong>Fuji</strong> Taro<br />

No. The following document(s)s will be printed.<br />

1<br />

<strong>User</strong> ID<br />

Doc.Name<br />

:<strong>Fuji</strong> Taro<br />

2001/10/7 8:10 AM<br />

:Secure Print 1<br />

2 Stored Date :2001/10/8 7:30 2001/10/8 PM 7:30 PM<br />

Select to delete or save the document after printing.<br />

Print and<br />

Delete<br />

Print and<br />

Save<br />

22<br />

5<br />

Refresh<br />

Cancel<br />

Print<br />

Delete<br />

Close<br />

Special Printing<br />

4<br />

75


Special Printing<br />

4<br />

76<br />

4.3 Secure Print<br />

■If Delete is selected:<br />

Selecting the No button will return you to the screen from step 4.<br />

<strong>Fuji</strong> Taro<br />

The following document will be deleted.<br />

1<br />

<strong>User</strong> ID<br />

Doc. Name<br />

:<strong>Fuji</strong> Taro<br />

2001/10/7 8:10 AM<br />

:Dialog SOD<br />

2 Stored Date<br />

Are you sure?<br />

:2001/10/8 2001/10/8 7:30 PM 7:30 PM<br />

Refresh<br />

Deleting all the documents of a user ID will delete the user ID.<br />

7 Select Close repeatedly until the Job Status screen is displayed.<br />

22<br />

5<br />

Yes No<br />

Close


4.4<br />

Sample Print<br />

When printing multiple copies, you can print out only the first set to check the printing result<br />

first before printing the remaining copies from the printer control panel. This feature is<br />

known as Sample Print.<br />

You need to set the user name before printing.<br />

Up to 200 users and 1,000 files per user can be set. You can save up to 9,999 files or until<br />

the hard disk is full.<br />

4.4.1 Setting Sample Print Jobs<br />

Procedure<br />

To use the Sample Print feature, you need to set the user name.<br />

1 From the Start menu, select Settings and then click <strong>Printer</strong>s to display<br />

the printer properties dialog box.<br />

2 Click the Paper/Output tab.<br />

Special Printing<br />

4<br />

77


Special Printing<br />

4<br />

78<br />

4.4 Sample Print<br />

3 Select Sample Print from the Job Type drop-down list box.<br />

The Sample Print Settings dialog box appears.<br />

4 Enter the user ID within 24 characters at the <strong>User</strong> ID text box.<br />

The user ID entered here will be displayed as the user ID on the Sample Print screen on the touch<br />

panel display of the machine.<br />

5 Click OK.<br />

4.4.2 Printing Sample Print Jobs<br />

This section describes how to print Sample Print jobs.<br />

First, set and send the Sample Print job at the client. Then, execute the print<br />

instruction at the machine to print out the remaining data.<br />

You can also check or delete print jobs saved in the machine using the same<br />

procedure of executing print instruction at the machine.<br />

At the computer<br />

Here, we use Wordpad of Windows 98 as an example. The procedure is the<br />

same when using other OS.<br />

Depending on the application program, the way to display the printer properties dialog box might differ.<br />

See the manual of the application program used.<br />

3


Procedure<br />

1 Select Print from the File menu.<br />

2 Check Name and then click Properties.<br />

3 Click the Paper/Output tab and set Copies to at least 2.<br />

4 Select Sample Print from the Job Type drop-down list box.<br />

The Sample Print Settings dialog box is displayed.<br />

If necessary, click the Sample Print button and change the settings.<br />

5 Confirm <strong>User</strong> ID.<br />

5<br />

6<br />

4<br />

4.4 Sample Print<br />

Special Printing<br />

4<br />

79


Special Printing<br />

4<br />

80<br />

4.4 Sample Print<br />

6 From Retrieve Document drop-down list box, select either Enter Document<br />

Name or Auto Retrieve.<br />

If Enter Document Name has been selected, enter the name within 24 characters at the Document<br />

Name text box.<br />

For either of the two options of specifying the document name, only the first 24 characters will be recognized<br />

if more than that are entered.<br />

The document name entered here will be displayed as the document name on the Sample Print screen<br />

on the touch panel display of the machine.<br />

7 Click OK.<br />

8 Click OK on the Paper/Output tab to carry out printing.<br />

At the machine<br />

Procedure<br />

The following describes the procedure to output the remaining print data stored<br />

inside the machine.<br />

1 On the control panel, press Job Status.<br />

The Job Status screen is displayed.<br />

2 On the screen, select Stored Documents and then Sample Print.<br />

Job Management<br />

Secure Print Sample Print<br />

Private Mailbox<br />

Current and<br />

Pending Jobs<br />

Completed Jobs<br />

Stored<br />

Documents<br />

Delayed Print<br />

The Sample Print screen is displayed and the user ID specified on the printer driver will be displayed.


4.4 Sample Print<br />

3 Select the user ID which you want to check, followed by Document<br />

List.<br />

Selecting the button will display the previous screen and the button the next screen. Or using<br />

the numeric keypad on the control panel, you can also enter the ID number at Go to to specify the<br />

required ID directly.<br />

Once the user ID has been selected, the saved number will be displayed at No. of Docs. on the bottom<br />

right of the screen.<br />

Selecting the Refresh button will display the latest information.<br />

Sample Print<br />

001 <strong>Fuji</strong> Taro 002 <strong>Fuji</strong> Hanako<br />

003 Endo<br />

004 Imai<br />

005 Fukada<br />

006 Motohashi<br />

The information of the document saved in the specified user ID will be displayed under Doc. Name,<br />

Stored Date and Pages. The name displayed in Doc. Name will be the document name set on the<br />

printer driver.<br />

4 Select the document to be printed, followed by Print.<br />

Selecting the Select All button will select all the documents. Selecting it again to deselect. To delete<br />

document, select the document, followed by the Delete button.<br />

<strong>Fuji</strong> Taro<br />

No. Doc. Name Stored Date Pages<br />

1 Planning Paper 2001/10/7 8:10 AM 52<br />

2 Goods Guidance 2001/10/8 7:30 PM 35<br />

A screen for confirmation will be displayed.<br />

Refresh<br />

Refresh<br />

Close<br />

Go to<br />

(001-200)<br />

Document List<br />

No. of Docs. : 2<br />

Select All<br />

Print<br />

Delete<br />

Close<br />

No. of Docs. : 2<br />

Special Printing<br />

4<br />

81


Special Printing<br />

4<br />

82<br />

4.4 Sample Print<br />

5 Check the contents displayed on the screen and then make the necessary<br />

selection.<br />

■If Print is selected:<br />

Selecting the No button will return you to the screen of step 4.<br />

<strong>Fuji</strong> Taro<br />

The following documents will be deleted after printed.<br />

<strong>User</strong> ID :<strong>Fuji</strong> Taro<br />

Doc. Name :Goods Guidance<br />

Stored Date :2001/10/8 7:30 PM<br />

Are you sure?<br />

Yes No<br />

Refresh<br />

■If Delete is selected:<br />

Selecting the No button will return you to the screen of step 4.<br />

<strong>Fuji</strong> Taro<br />

The following document(s) will be deleted.<br />

<strong>User</strong> ID :<strong>Fuji</strong> Taro<br />

Doc. Name :Goods Guidance<br />

Stored Date :2001/10/8 7:30 PM<br />

Are you sure?<br />

Yes No<br />

Refresh<br />

Deleting all the documents of an user ID will delete the user ID.<br />

6 Select Close repeatedly until the Job Status screen is displayed.<br />

Close<br />

Close


4.5<br />

Delayed Print<br />

You can start the print job at the time set in advance. You can also start printing before<br />

reaching the time using the control panel. This feature is known as Delayed Print.<br />

You need to set the user name before printing.<br />

Up to 200 users and 1,000 files per user can be set. You can save up to 9,999 files or until<br />

the hard disk is full.<br />

4.5.1 Setting Delayed Print Jobs<br />

Procedure<br />

To use the Delayed Print feature, you need to set the user name.<br />

1 From the Start menu, select Settings and then click <strong>Printer</strong>s to display<br />

the printer properties dialog box.<br />

2 Click the Paper/Output tab.<br />

Special Printing<br />

4<br />

83


Special Printing<br />

4<br />

84<br />

4.5 Delayed Print<br />

3 Select Delayed Print from the Job Type drop-down list box.<br />

The Delayed Print Settings dialog box appears.<br />

4 Enter the time on a 24-hour basis to start printing at the Time box.<br />

5 Click OK.


4.5.2 Printing Delayed Print Jobs<br />

4.5 Delayed Print<br />

This section describes how to print Delayed Print jobs.<br />

First, set and send the Delayed Print job at the client. When printing the delayed<br />

print jobs before being time to be set, use the control panel on the machine.<br />

You can also check or delete print jobs saved in the machine using the same<br />

procedure of executing print instruction at the printer.<br />

At the computer<br />

Procedure<br />

Here, we use Wordpad of Windows 98 as an example. The procedure is the<br />

same when using other OS.<br />

Depending on the application program, the way to display the printer properties dialog box might differ.<br />

See the manual of the application program used.<br />

1 Select Print from the File menu.<br />

2 Check Name and then click Properties.<br />

3 Click the Paper/Output tab.<br />

4 Select Delayed Print from the Job Type drop-down list box.<br />

The Delayed Print dialog box is displayed.<br />

If necessary, click the Delayed Print button and change the settings.<br />

Special Printing<br />

4<br />

85


Special Printing<br />

4<br />

86<br />

4.5 Delayed Print<br />

5 Confirm the time at the Time box.<br />

6 From Retrieve Document drop-down list box, select either Enter Document<br />

Name or Auto Retrieve.<br />

If Enter Document Name has been selected, enter the name within 24 characters at the Document<br />

Name text box.<br />

For either of the two options of specifying the document name, only the first 24 characters will be recognized<br />

if more than that are entered.<br />

The document name entered here will be displayed as the document name on the Delayed Print screen<br />

on the touch panel display of the printer.<br />

7 Click OK.<br />

8 Click OK on the Paper/Output tab to carry out printing.<br />

At the printer<br />

Procedure<br />

The following describes the procedure to output the remaining print data stored<br />

inside the printer forcibely before the time specified on the computer driver will<br />

come.<br />

1 On the control panel, press Job Status.<br />

The Job Status screen is displayed.


4.5 Delayed Print<br />

2 On the screen, select Stored Documents and then Delayed Print.<br />

Job Management<br />

Current and<br />

Pending Jobs<br />

Completed Jobs<br />

Secure Print Sample Print Delayed Print<br />

Private Mailbox<br />

The Delayed Print screen is displayed and the Time specified on the printer driver is displayed.<br />

3 Select the document to be printed before the specified time, followed by<br />

Print.<br />

To delete document, select the document, followed by the Delete button.<br />

Delayed Print<br />

No. Document Name Print Time Pages<br />

1 Planning Paper 10:00 AM<br />

52<br />

2 Goods Guidance 11:50 AM<br />

35<br />

3 <strong>User</strong>s <strong>Guide</strong><br />

8:36 PM 620<br />

A screen for confirmation will be displayed.<br />

Stored<br />

Documents<br />

Refresh<br />

Print<br />

Delete<br />

Close<br />

No. of Docs: 3<br />

Special Printing<br />

4<br />

87


Special Printing<br />

4<br />

88<br />

4.5 Delayed Print<br />

4 Check the contents displayed on the screen and then make the necessary<br />

selection.<br />

■If Print is selected:<br />

Selecting the No button will return to the screen of Step 4.<br />

Delayed Print<br />

Refresh<br />

The following document(s) will be deleted after printing.<br />

Doc. Name :Planning Paper<br />

Print Time :10:00 AM (Stored Date : 2001/10/8 9:50 PM)<br />

<strong>User</strong> Name :<strong>Fuji</strong> Taro<br />

Host Name :Alpha<br />

The job will not print at the programmed time. Do you want to print now?<br />

Yes No<br />

■If Delete is selected:<br />

Selecting the No button will return to the screen of Step 4.<br />

Delayed Print<br />

The following document(s) will be deleted.<br />

Doc. Name :Planning Paper<br />

Print Time :10:00 AM (Stored Date : 2001/10/8 9:50 PM)<br />

<strong>User</strong> Name<br />

Host Name<br />

Are you sure?<br />

:<strong>Fuji</strong> Taro<br />

:Alpha<br />

Yes No<br />

Refresh<br />

5 Select Close repeatedly until the Job Status screen is displayed.<br />

Close<br />

Close


4.6<br />

Expanding Print Areas for<br />

Printing<br />

By changing the print area and the margins, you can expand the print area for printing.<br />

Depending on the application program, you might not obtain the desired print result.<br />

“A.2 Printable Area” (P. 233) for details on the printable areas.<br />

Display the Print Areas/Margin dialog box to configure the print settings.<br />

Here, we use Wordpad of Windows 98 as an example. The procedure is the same when<br />

using other OS.<br />

● Depending on the application program, the way to display the printer properties dialog box might differ. See the<br />

manual of the application program used.<br />

● <strong>User</strong>s who are considered as Guests, Replicator or <strong>User</strong>s of Windows 2000, Windows XP or Windows NT 4.0<br />

cannot configure the margin settings.<br />

Procedure<br />

1 Select Print from the File menu.<br />

2 Check Name and then click Properties.<br />

3 Click Printable Area on the Paper/Output tab.<br />

The Printable Area dialog box is displayed.<br />

3<br />

Special Printing<br />

4<br />

89


Special Printing<br />

4<br />

90<br />

4.6 Expanding Print Areas for Printing<br />

4 Click Extended.<br />

5 Click OK.<br />

6 Click OK on the Paper/Output tab to carry out printing.<br />

4


4.7<br />

E-mail Printing<br />

You can send an e-mail with a TIFF or PDF document attached, from the computer to the<br />

machine. Upon receiving the mail, the machine will print it out automatically. This feature is<br />

known as “E-mail Printing”.<br />

In order to print PDF document, you need the PostScript Software Kit (option).<br />

4.7.1 System Environment<br />

The following settings have to be configured in order to use the E-mail Printing<br />

feature. Check with your system administrator or network administrator on<br />

whether these settings have been configured.<br />

Network environment<br />

Register the user account.<br />

Mail Print environment<br />

Using CentreWare Internet Services, set the Port Status, Machine E-mail<br />

Address, TCP/IP, and mail server settings.<br />

Special Printing<br />

4<br />

91


Special Printing<br />

4<br />

92<br />

4.7 E-mail Printing<br />

Procedure<br />

1 Activate CentreWare Internet Services and then click Properties.<br />

“5.4 Activating” (P. 113) for details on activating CentreWare Internet Services.<br />

2 Do the settings for the items shown in the table below.<br />

Item in the<br />

frame<br />

Machine<br />

Details<br />

Item Description Value<br />

Administrator<br />

E-mail<br />

Address<br />

Machine Email<br />

Address<br />

Sets the administrator’s e-mail<br />

address.<br />

Sets the e-mail address of this<br />

machine. This address is displayed<br />

at the From box on e-mail.<br />

● When receiving E-Mail via SMTP<br />

An alias cannot be set. You can set<br />

any name for the account (on the<br />

left side of @). Set the address<br />

section (on the right side of @),<br />

with the combination of the host<br />

name and domain name.<br />

<br />

ifax@dcc400.fujixerox.co.jp<br />

Account name: ifax<br />

Host name: dcc400<br />

Domain Name: fujixerox.co.jp<br />

Enter an<br />

address<br />

within 127<br />

characters.<br />

Settings to<br />

define based<br />

on the protocol<br />

SMTP POP3


Item in the<br />

frame<br />

Machine<br />

Details<br />

Item Description Value<br />

Machine Email<br />

Address<br />

● When receiving E-mails via POP3<br />

Enter the POP user name (on the<br />

left side of @) and incoming POP3<br />

mail server name in the address<br />

section (on the right side of @).<br />

You can set an alias, such as<br />

ifax@fujixerox.co.jp.<br />

<br />

ifax@mb1.abc.fujixerox.co.jp<br />

Account name: ifax<br />

Enter an<br />

address<br />

within 127<br />

characters.<br />

Port Status Receive E-mail<br />

Send E-mail<br />

Select the check box.<br />

TCP/IP under Host Name Sets the host name of this machine. Enter an<br />

Protocol Set-<br />

address<br />

tings<br />

within 32<br />

characters.<br />

Get DNS Select the check box if you want to<br />

Address get the DNS server address automatically<br />

from the DHCP server.<br />

DNS<br />

Address1-3<br />

Domain<br />

Name<br />

Enter the DNS server address. xxx.xxx.xxx.<br />

xxx<br />

Enter the DNS domain name. Enter an<br />

address<br />

within 255<br />

characters.<br />

4.7 E-mail Printing<br />

Settings to<br />

define based<br />

on the protocol<br />

SMTP POP3<br />

: Must set<br />

— : No need to set<br />

3 Scroll down the frame and click Apply New Settings, and then on the<br />

displayed screen, click Reboot.<br />

4 Configure the setting of the items in the following table to match the Email<br />

Printing environment.<br />

—<br />

—<br />

—<br />

Special Printing<br />

4<br />

93


Special Printing<br />

4<br />

94<br />

4.7 E-mail Printing<br />

Item in the<br />

frame<br />

E-mail under<br />

Protocol Settings<br />

Item Description Value<br />

Receiving<br />

Protocol<br />

Print Mail<br />

Headers and<br />

Contents<br />

POP3 Server<br />

Address<br />

POP3 Server<br />

Check Interval<br />

POP <strong>User</strong><br />

Name<br />

POP <strong>User</strong><br />

Password<br />

STMP SendingAuthentication<br />

STMP Server<br />

Address<br />

Sets how the mail is to be received to<br />

match your environment.<br />

Sets the contents to be printed when<br />

printing both the received mail and<br />

the header of the e-mail. Select All<br />

Headers and Contents when you<br />

want to print all items of the email.<br />

Sets the POP3 server address for<br />

receiving the mail.<br />

Sets the interval to check mail in the<br />

POP3 server.<br />

Sets the user name for connecting to<br />

the POP3 server. Only one user can<br />

be set.<br />

Sets the password for each user<br />

name and enter the same password<br />

again at the Confirm Password box.<br />

Allows you to confirm the user at the<br />

POP server before sending e-mails<br />

to the SMTP server. Check valid in<br />

the checkbox.<br />

*SMTP,<br />

POP3<br />

*Basic<br />

Headers<br />

and Contents,<br />

None,<br />

Based on<br />

Comment,<br />

All Headers<br />

and Contents<br />

Up to 128<br />

characters<br />

can be<br />

entered,<br />

including “.”<br />

(full stop)<br />

and “-”<br />

(hyphen).<br />

1 to 120<br />

minutes<br />

*10 minutes<br />

Enter each<br />

name within<br />

64 characters.<br />

Enter a<br />

password<br />

within 64<br />

characters.<br />

Invalid*<br />

Valid<br />

Set the SMTP server address. Up to 128<br />

characters can<br />

be entered,<br />

including “.”<br />

and “-”.<br />

* : default values<br />

Settings to<br />

define based<br />

on the protocol<br />

SMTP POP3<br />

—<br />

—<br />

—<br />

—<br />

: Must set<br />

— : No need to set


4.7 E-mail Printing<br />

5 Scroll down the frame and click Apply New Settings, and then on the<br />

displayed screen, click Reboot.<br />

4.7.2 Sending E-mail<br />

Procedure<br />

This section describes how to send mails to the machine from the computer<br />

using Outlook Express as an example.<br />

1 Using your e-mail software, create a mail and then attach a TIFF or<br />

PDF document, if available.<br />

● If the file format of the attached document is not “.tif” nor “.pdf”, you might not be able to print<br />

correctly.<br />

● Up to 31 documents can be attached.<br />

2 Enter the e-mail address of the receiving machine.<br />

Special Printing<br />

4<br />

95


Special Printing<br />

4<br />

96<br />

4.7 E-mail Printing<br />

3 Send the e-mail.<br />

After the e-mail has been received at the machine, it will be automatically printed.<br />

The e-mail itself and the attached document will be printed at the machine based on the following settings:<br />

● The e-mail itself:<br />

Default values of the PCL printer driver<br />

● The attached TIFF document:<br />

Default values of the logical printer settings for TIFF of the Emulation Settings of CentreWare<br />

Internet Services.<br />

● The attached PDF document:<br />

Default values of the logical printer settings for PostScript of the Emulation Settings of CentreWare<br />

Internet Services.


4.8<br />

Notify Job End by E-mail<br />

You can configure an e-mail to be sent to the computer to notify that a job has ended.<br />

Here, we use Wordpad of Windows 98 as an example. The procedure is the same when<br />

using other OS.<br />

4.8.1 System Environment<br />

The following settings have to be configured in order to use the Mail Notification<br />

feature. Check with your system administrator or network administrator on<br />

whether these settings have been configured.<br />

Network Environment and Mail Environment Settings<br />

● Register the user account.<br />

● Set the Mail Environment.<br />

“4.7 E-mail Printing” (P. 91) for details on Setting Mail Environment.<br />

Mail Notification Environment Setting<br />

Procedure<br />

Using CentreWare Internet Services, configure the setting for using the Mail<br />

Notification feature.<br />

1 Activate CentreWare Internet Services and then click Properties.<br />

“5.4 Activating” (P. 113) for details on activating CentreWare Internet Services.<br />

Special Printing<br />

4<br />

97


Special Printing<br />

4<br />

98<br />

4.8 Notify Job End by E-mail<br />

2 From the left frame of the screen displayed, select Port Status.<br />

3 Check the Enable check box of Mail Notice.<br />

4 Click Apply New Settings.<br />

If a message prompts for the user name and password, enter these items and then click OK. If a message<br />

prompts for the machine to be reboot, switch off the power of the machine and then on again.


4.8 Notify Job End by E-mail<br />

5 If the machine has been reboot, check that it has been activated and<br />

then select Mail Notice Settings from the left frame.<br />

If necessary, configure setting for other items.<br />

6 Scroll down the frame and click Apply New Settings. If a message<br />

prompts for the user name and password, enter these items and then<br />

click OK. If a message prompts for the machine to be reboot, switch off<br />

the power of the machine and then on again.<br />

4.8.2 Notifying by E-mail<br />

Procedure<br />

Here, we use Wordpad of Windows 98 as an example. The procedure is the<br />

same when using other OS.<br />

1 From the Start menu, select Settings and then click <strong>Printer</strong>s to display<br />

the printer properties dialog box.<br />

2 Click the Configuration tab.<br />

Special Printing<br />

4<br />

99


Special Printing<br />

4<br />

100<br />

4.8 Notify Job End by E-mail<br />

3 Select Notify Job End by E-mail from the Print Features list box.<br />

4 Select On from the Notify Job End by E-mail drop-down list box.<br />

5 Enter an e-mail address at the Mail Address box.<br />

6 Click OK.


4.9<br />

Adding Banner Sheet for<br />

Printing<br />

During printing, you can add paper used for sorting/classifying (banner sheet) to differentiate<br />

a printed sheet from the rest.<br />

You can configure the setting for the banner sheet on this machine.<br />

● Banner sheets are not stapled when the staple feature has been set.<br />

● The number of banner sheet printed will be added to the meter.<br />

“5.7.2 Others (Print Mode Settings)” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on setting banner<br />

sheet.<br />

Special Printing<br />

4<br />

101


Special Printing<br />

4<br />

102<br />

4.10<br />

File Upload Printing<br />

You can print a TIFF file or a PDF file by uploading files to the machine using a browser.<br />

Procedure<br />

1 Activate CentreWare Internet Services and then click Services.<br />

“5.4 Activating” for details on actibating CentreWare Internet Services.<br />

2 Click Browse in the File Name group.<br />

The Choose file dialog box appears.<br />

3 In the Choose file dialog box, specify a file on the computer.<br />

4 If necessary, set the other settings in the window.


5 Click Start to start printing.<br />

4.10 File Upload Printing<br />

Special Printing<br />

4<br />

103


5Configuring From<br />

Computer (CentreWare<br />

Internet Services)<br />

5.1 About CentreWare Internet Services ............................................. 106<br />

5.1.1 Introduction..................................................................... 106<br />

5.1.2 Structure Screen............................................................. 107<br />

5.1.3 System Structure ............................................................ 108<br />

5.1.4 Target OS and Browsers................................................. 109<br />

5.2 Configuring Browser ...................................................................... 110<br />

5.2.1 For Netscape Communicator.......................................... 110<br />

5.2.2 For Internet Explorer....................................................... 110<br />

5.2.3 Proxy Server and Port Number....................................... 111<br />

5.3 Configuring Machine...................................................................... 112<br />

5.4 Activating ....................................................................................... 113<br />

5.5 Troubleshooting.............................................................................. 114


Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)<br />

5<br />

106<br />

5.1<br />

5.1.1 Introduction<br />

About CentreWare Internet<br />

Services<br />

CentreWare Internet Services is a software that enables you to use a web<br />

browser to display the printer/job status or change the settings of this machine<br />

when it has been configured for use in TCP/IP environment.<br />

Among the items that can be set through the touch panel display for this machine<br />

to be used as a printer, you can use the Properties screen of this software to set<br />

items like system setting as well as the setting of each network port.<br />

“Chapter 5 System Administration Mode Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier)<br />

for details on items that can be set through the touch panel display.<br />

Depending on the item, some settings become effective only after rebooting (i.e. switching off/on the<br />

machine or defining the system setting using the printer control panel).<br />

The main features of each tab of CentreWare Internet Services are as follows:<br />

Tab Main Features<br />

● Services Allows you to configure settings and print documents stored in your<br />

computer.<br />

● Jobs Displays the job list/job history and deletes jobs.<br />

● Status Displays the host device status.<br />

● Displays the status of paper tray/output tray, as well as consumables<br />

like toner.<br />

● Properties Displays or configures the following items: machine details and date/<br />

time settings; configuration settings like memory and printer language;<br />

counter settings; paper trays setting; paper settings; save energy mode<br />

settings; fax list settings; mailbox settings; mail notice settings; Internet<br />

services settings; port status settings.<br />

● Sets every port.<br />

● Sets every protocol.<br />

● Sets emulation.<br />

● Sets memory.<br />

Maintenance ● Displays error history report.<br />

Support ● Displays support information.


5.1.2 Structure Screen<br />

5.1 About CentreWare Internet Services<br />

The CentreWare Internet Services screen is made up of four frames (partitioned<br />

screens).<br />

There is a frame at the top and bottom of the window, that is as wide as the<br />

browser, as well as two between these, which are on the left and right. The contents<br />

displayed on each frame change according to the features used (Jobs, Status,<br />

Properties, Maintenance, Support).<br />

Clicking the Help button at the bottom frame will display the On-line Help file containing explanations<br />

on CentreWare Internet Services.<br />

Left frame<br />

Top frame<br />

The frame displayed at the top of the window. By default, a logo mark and the<br />

printer name will be displayed. Besides the logo mark and machine name, each<br />

feature page will display a link to the top page as well as tabs for moving to each<br />

feature.<br />

Bottom frame<br />

Top frame<br />

Right frame<br />

Bottom frame<br />

Usually, it displays the links to the Home Page of our company, the copyright<br />

screen and the Help file. The contents in this frame remain unchanged regardless<br />

of the page that is being displayed.<br />

Click the Help button to display the Help file for details on each of the features of<br />

CentreWare Internet Services.<br />

Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)<br />

5<br />

107


Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)<br />

5<br />

108<br />

5.1 About CentreWare Internet Services<br />

Right and left frames<br />

The contents in these frames will change according to the features selected. The<br />

items that can be set as well as information on them will be displayed in these<br />

frames once a feature is selected.<br />

You can drag the line separating the left and right frames to change their size of these frames. The<br />

position of the line separating the top and bottom frames cannot be changed.<br />

5.1.3 System Structure<br />

To use CentreWare Internet Services, you need to activate an environment<br />

using TCP/IP and enable this software on the machine.


5.1.4 Target OS and Browsers<br />

5.1 About CentreWare Internet Services<br />

The OS and browsers that can be used for CentreWare Internet Services are as<br />

follows:<br />

Target OS<br />

● Microsoft Windows 95 (Service Pack 1 or later)<br />

● Microsoft Windows 98<br />

● Microsoft Windows 98 Second Edition<br />

● Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition<br />

● Microsoft Windows NT Workstation 4.0 (Service Pack 4 or later)<br />

● Microsoft Windows NT Server 4.0 (Service Pack 4 or later)<br />

● Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional (with Service Pack 2)<br />

● Microsoft Windows 2000 Server (with Service Pack 2)<br />

● Microsoft Windows XP Professional Edition<br />

● Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition<br />

● Mac OS 8.0 or later<br />

Browsers<br />

■For Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows<br />

2000, Windows XP:<br />

● Netscape Communicator ver. 4.51 or later<br />

● Internet Explorer ver. 4.01SP2 or later<br />

■For Macintosh:<br />

● Netscape Communicator ver. 4.5 or later<br />

● Internet Explorer ver. 5.0 or later<br />

Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)<br />

5<br />

109


Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)<br />

5<br />

110<br />

5.2<br />

Configuring Browser<br />

Before using CentreWare Internet Services, check the following settings for the browser to<br />

be used:<br />

5.2.1 For Netscape Communicator<br />

Procedure<br />

Here, we use Netscape Communicator 4.51 of Windows NT 4.0 as an example.<br />

1 From the Edit menu, select Preferences.<br />

2 From the Category tree, select Advanced.<br />

3 Click the sign on the left of Advanced.<br />

4 Click Cache under Advanced.<br />

5 Click Once per session or Every time for Document in cache is compared<br />

to document on network.<br />

6 Click OK.<br />

5.2.2 For Internet Explorer<br />

Procedure<br />

Here, we use Internet Explorer 5.5 of Windows NT 4.0 as an example.<br />

1 Select Internet Options from the Display menu for version 4.x, and<br />

Internet Options from the Tools menu for version 5.x.<br />

2 Click Settings for Temporary Internet files on the General tab.<br />

3 For Check for newer versions of stored pages on the Settings tab,<br />

select either Every visit to the page or Every time you start Internet<br />

Explorer.<br />

4 Click OK.


5.2.3 Proxy Server and Port Number<br />

5.2 Configuring Browser<br />

You also need to check the proxy server setting and port number before using<br />

CentreWare Internet Services.<br />

Proxy server setting<br />

When using CentreWare Internet Services, it is recommended to make direct<br />

connection without going through a proxy server.<br />

When connection has been made through a proxy server, it might take a long time to set the IP address<br />

using the browser and the screen might not be displayed. When this happens, you have to set the IP<br />

address at the browser without going through a proxy server. For details on how to define these settings,<br />

see the manual of the browser that you are using.<br />

Port number setting<br />

The default port number of CentreWare Internet Services is “80”. The port number<br />

can be changed on the Properties screen > Protocol Settings > HTTP. The<br />

port numbers that can be set are “80” or “8,000” to “9,999”.<br />

To enter the port number at the browser after it has been changed, you have to<br />

add a “:” after the IP address or Internet address before adding it.<br />

For example, specify the port number as follows after it has been defined as<br />

“8080”:<br />

http://IP address: 8080<br />

or<br />

http://Internet address: 8080<br />

The port number can be checked under the Communication Settings item on the System Settings List.<br />

For details on printing the System Settings List, see “6.6 Printing Reports/Lists” in “Part 1 Hardware”<br />

of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier).<br />

Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)<br />

5<br />

111


Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)<br />

5<br />

112<br />

5.3<br />

Configuring Machine<br />

To use CentreWare Internet Services, you have to set the following items using the touch<br />

panel display:<br />

● IP address and if necessary, subnet mask and gateway address<br />

● Internet Services to Enabled (default: Disabled)<br />

● “1.3 Setting IP Address” (P. 13) for details on setting IP address.<br />

● “1.4 Setting Port” (P. 18) for details on setting the port.


5.4 Activating<br />

This section describes the steps you have to carry out on the host device in order to use<br />

CentreWare Internet Services.<br />

Procedure<br />

1 Activate the host device, and then the browser.<br />

2 Enter the IP address or host name of this machine at the address column<br />

of the browser, and then press Enter on the keyboard.<br />

Check with the system administrator on the IP address and host name to be entered.<br />

■Example of specifying IP address<br />

■Example of specifying host name<br />

When specifying a port number, add “:” after the address, followed by “80” (default port number).<br />

The CentreWare Internet Services screen will be displayed.<br />

Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)<br />

5<br />

113


Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)<br />

5<br />

114<br />

5.5 Troubleshooting<br />

On the Jobs and Maintenance screens, the detailed status of the print jobs specified for<br />

each of the interface and on the printer control panel will be displayed.<br />

Cause Action<br />

Cannot connect to CentreWare<br />

Internet Services.<br />

The “Please wait” message is<br />

displayed throughout at the<br />

browser.<br />

Is the machine working properly?<br />

Check if the power of the machine is switched on.<br />

Is CentreWare Internet Services activated? Print out the System<br />

Settings List to check.<br />

Is the Internet address correctly entered?<br />

Check the Internet address again. If cannot be connected, enter the<br />

IP address to make connection.<br />

Is the proxy server being used?<br />

Depending on the proxy server, connections might not be possible.<br />

Without using the proxy server, configure either the browser setting<br />

to one without using proxy server or the address to be connected to<br />

one without using proxy server.<br />

Is the Ethernet cable properly connected?<br />

Check that the Ethernet cable of the computer and machine is properly<br />

connected.<br />

Just for a while as instructed.<br />

If nothing happens, try clicking the Refresh button of the browser. If<br />

nothing happens, check if the machine is working properly.<br />

The Refresh button is not working.<br />

Are you using the specified OS and browser?<br />

Selecting menu in the left frame<br />

does not change the right frame<br />

contents.<br />

See “5.1 About CentreWare Internet Services” (P. 106), and check if<br />

the OS and browser you are using can be used.<br />

The screen display is distorted. Change the window size of the browser.<br />

The latest information is not displayed.<br />

Click the Refresh button.<br />

Clicking the Apply New Settings<br />

button does not change anything.<br />

Clicking the Apply New Settings<br />

button will display in the<br />

browser, messages like “No<br />

data.” or “The server has<br />

returned ineffective or unrecognizable<br />

response.”<br />

Is the entered value correct?<br />

If the entered value is not a valid entry, it will change automatically to<br />

an entry within the limit.<br />

Are the user name and password correct?<br />

Enter the correct user name and password.<br />

Reboot the machine.


Part 2 <strong>Scanner</strong>


1Setting <strong>Scanner</strong><br />

Environment<br />

1.1 <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment .................................................................... 118<br />

1.1.1 Scanning With the Mailbox ............................................. 118<br />

1.1.2 Scanning Services With Job Template ........................... 119<br />

1.2 Flow of Configuring Scanning ........................................................ 120<br />

1.3 Using Scan Features...................................................................... 121<br />

1.3.1 Target OS and System Environment .............................. 121<br />

1.3.2 Connecting Cable ........................................................... 121<br />

1.4 Configuring for Using Mailbox ........................................................ 122<br />

1.4.1 Setting IP Address.......................................................... 122<br />

1.4.2 Activating Port for Scanning (Salutation) ........................ 122<br />

1.4.3 Creating Mailbox............................................................. 127<br />

1.5 Configuring for Using Job Template............................................... 133<br />

1.5.1 Setting IP Address.......................................................... 133<br />

1.5.2 Activating FTP Client ...................................................... 133<br />

1.6 Configuring Computer.................................................................... 138<br />

1.6.1 Using Mailbox ................................................................. 138<br />

1.6.2 Using Job Template ........................................................ 138<br />

1.7 Installing the Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility ............................................ 139<br />

1.7.1 Required Environment .................................................... 139<br />

1.7.2 Installation ...................................................................... 140<br />

1.7.3 Uninstallation .................................................................. 142


Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 118<br />

1<br />

1.1<br />

<strong>Scanner</strong> Environment<br />

This machine has two types of scanner function:<br />

● <strong>Scanner</strong> function using mailbox<br />

● <strong>Scanner</strong> function using Job Template<br />

The following describes the summary of each scan feature.<br />

1.1.1 Scanning With the Mailbox<br />

The scanner function using mailbox is available in this machine when you connect<br />

it to a network environment using TCP/IP protocol.<br />

Scan the desired document as data using this machine and store it in the mailbox.<br />

The stored document can be retrieved from a computer connected to the<br />

network.<br />

Besides scanned documents, you can also retrieve from the mailbox, faxed documents<br />

received from other facsimile.


1.1 <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment<br />

1.1.2 Scanning Services With Job Template<br />

Specify a file with configured conditions (known as Job Template) and scan the<br />

necessary document with this machine. The scanned document will be saved to<br />

the hard disk of this machine and then sent automatically to the computer<br />

(server) connected to the network. You need to use the optional CentreWare<br />

Scanning Services to create the Job Template.<br />

When using Job Template, only the necessary processes on this machine will be explained in this<br />

guide. Help for CentreWare Internet Services or the “CentreWare Scanning Services Installation<br />

<strong>Guide</strong>” for information on the operations that need to be done on the computer.<br />

Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 1<br />

119


Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 120<br />

1<br />

1.2<br />

Flow of Configuring<br />

Scanning<br />

The flow of configuring the scanning functions is as follows:<br />

Before setting the scan features, check that this machine is connected to the network by network cable. For details on<br />

connecting to the network, see “Chapter 2 Setting up Network” (P. 25) in “Part 1 <strong>Printer</strong>”.


1.3<br />

Using Scan Features<br />

This section describes the essential environment for using the scan feature.<br />

1.3.1 Target OS and System Environment<br />

The essential conditions for scanning using either the mailbox or Job Template<br />

are as follows:<br />

CentreWare Scanning Services Installation <strong>Guide</strong> for details on the target OS and system environment<br />

when using CentreWare Scanning Services.<br />

Target OS<br />

● Microsoft Windows 95 (Service Pack 1 or later)<br />

● Microsoft Windows 98<br />

● Microsoft Windows 98 Second Edition<br />

● Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition<br />

● Microsoft Windows NT Workstation 4.0 (Service Pack 4 or later)<br />

● Microsoft Windows NT Server 4.0 (Service Pack 4 or later)<br />

● Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional (with Service Pack 2 and Service Pack<br />

3)<br />

● Microsoft Windows 2000 Server (with Service Pack 2 and Service Pack 3)<br />

● Microsoft Windows XP Professional Edition<br />

● Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition<br />

Microsoft Windows NT Server 4.0 Terminal Server Edition, Microsoft Windows 2000 Server Terminal<br />

Services, Microsoft Windows 2000 Advanced Server Terminal Services, and Windows XP Remote<br />

Desktop cannot be used as the target OS.<br />

Network<br />

This machine and the computer must be connected to a network and be able to<br />

communicate by TCP/IP protocol.<br />

1.3.2 Connecting Cable<br />

Connect this machine to a network using interface cable.<br />

For details on connecting interface cable, see “1.2 Connecting Interface Cable” (P. 10) in “Part 1<br />

<strong>Printer</strong>”.<br />

Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment<br />

1<br />

121


Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 122<br />

1<br />

1.4<br />

Configuring for Using<br />

Mailbox<br />

To scan with the mailbox, configure the following settings on this machine:<br />

● set IP address<br />

● activate the port for scanning (salutation)<br />

● create a mailbox for saving scanned documents<br />

1.4.1 Setting IP Address<br />

For details on setting IP address, see “1.3 Setting IP Address” (P. 13) in “Part 1<br />

<strong>Printer</strong>”.<br />

If an IP address has already been set for the printing function, you do not need to<br />

do any setting here.<br />

1.4.2 Activating Port for Scanning (Salutation)<br />

This section describes the procedure to set the port for scanning (salutation) to<br />

Enabled (default: Disabled).<br />

You can activate the port by using either the System Administration Mode<br />

through the touch panel display or the CentreWare Internet Services.<br />

● “Chapter 5 System Administration Mode Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong><br />

(Copier) for details on System Administration Mode.<br />

● “5.6.1 Port Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on the ports that<br />

can be set.<br />

● “Chapter 5 Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)” (P. 105) in “Part 1<br />

<strong>Printer</strong>” for details on CentreWare Internet Services.<br />

The following describes the procedure of using System Administration Mode as<br />

an example.


Procedure<br />

1.4 Configuring for Using Mailbox<br />

1 On the control panel, press Password/System Settings.<br />

Either the System Administrator Menu screen or System Administrator – Password Entry screen will<br />

be displayed.<br />

If the System Administrator Menu screen is displayed, proceed to step 2.<br />

System Administrator Menu<br />

If the System Administrator – Password Entry screen is displayed, see “5.2.1 Entering the System<br />

Administration Mode” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on entering the<br />

password.<br />

<br />

2 On the screen, select System Settings.<br />

System Administrator Menu<br />

The System Settings screen is displayed.<br />

<strong>User</strong> Mode System Settings<br />

<br />

<br />

<strong>User</strong> Mode System Settings<br />

<br />

Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 1<br />

123


Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 1<br />

124<br />

1.4 Configuring for Using Mailbox<br />

3 Select System Settings.<br />

System Settings<br />

System Settings<br />

Auditron<br />

Administration<br />

The System Settings screen is displayed.<br />

4 Select Network Settings.<br />

System Settings<br />

The Network Settings screen is displayed.<br />

5 Select Port Settings.<br />

The Port Settings screen is displayed.<br />

Setup Menu<br />

Close<br />

System Administrator<br />

Password<br />

Close<br />

Common Settings Copy Mode Settings Network Settings<br />

Print Mode Settings<br />

<br />

Scan Mode Settings


1.4 Configuring for Using Mailbox<br />

6 Select to display the next screen, and check Current Settings for<br />

Salutation on the screen.<br />

If it is Enabled, there is no need to do any setting. Proceed to step 11.<br />

Port Settings<br />

Items Current Settings<br />

6. EtherTalk<br />

Disabled<br />

7. Salutation<br />

Disabled<br />

8. Port 9100<br />

Disabled<br />

9. SNMP<br />

Disabled<br />

10. FTP Client Disabled<br />

For the remaining steps, Salutation is assumed to be Disabled in this example.<br />

7 Select Salutation and then Change Settings.<br />

Port Settings<br />

Items Current Settings<br />

6. EtherTalk<br />

Disabled<br />

7. Salutation<br />

Disabled<br />

8. Port 9100<br />

Disabled<br />

9. SNMP<br />

Disabled<br />

10. FTP Client Disabled<br />

The Salutation screen is displayed.<br />

8 Select Port Status and then Change Settings.<br />

Salutation<br />

Items Current Settings<br />

1. Port Status Disabled<br />

The Salutation - Port Status screen is displayed.<br />

2/3<br />

2/3<br />

Close<br />

Change<br />

Settings<br />

Close<br />

Change<br />

Settings<br />

Close<br />

Change<br />

Settings<br />

Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 1<br />

125


Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 1<br />

126<br />

1.4 Configuring for Using Mailbox<br />

9 Select Enable and then Save.<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

The Salutation screen is displayed.<br />

10 Check that Current Settings for Port Status is Enabled and then select<br />

Close.<br />

Salutation<br />

Items Current Settings<br />

1. Port Status Enabled<br />

The Port Settings screen is displayed.<br />

<br />

11 Select Close repeatedly until the System Settings screen is displayed.<br />

12 Select Close.<br />

The machine will reboot and the display will return to the previous screen prior to this procedure.<br />

Press the Features button on the control panel, and then on the screen, check that Scan is displayed on<br />

the Menu screen.<br />

<br />

Close<br />

Change<br />

Settings


1.4.3 Creating Mailbox<br />

1.4 Configuring for Using Mailbox<br />

This section describes how to create a mailbox to save scanned documents.<br />

You can use either the touch panel display or CentreWare Internet Services to<br />

create a mailbox.<br />

You can retrieve documents in the mailbox to an application program from a<br />

computer using the scanner driver.<br />

Up to 200 mailboxes can be created and the settings or options that can be<br />

changed are as follows:<br />

● Mailbox Name<br />

Sets the name of the mailbox. Up to 10 characters can be used.<br />

● Password<br />

Sets the mailbox password within 20 digits. You can configure settings without<br />

the password. This password will be effective only if the System Administrator’s<br />

password has been enabled.<br />

● Check Password<br />

Sets whether to check password for every sending and retrieving of faxes in<br />

the mailbox when the password has been set.<br />

● Delete/Save Documents<br />

Sets whether to delete mailbox documents automatically after receiving or<br />

printing the documents.<br />

When the fax feature has been installed, the options available for setting will be displayed with Mailbox<br />

Options(Fax Doc.). For details on the contents of the options, see “9.6 Creating a Mailbox” in the<br />

<strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Facsimile).<br />

“Chapter 5 Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)” (P. 105) in “Part 1<br />

<strong>Printer</strong>” for details on CentreWare Internet Services.<br />

Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 1<br />

127


Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 1<br />

128<br />

1.4 Configuring for Using Mailbox<br />

Procedure<br />

The following describes the procedure of using the touch panel display as an<br />

example.<br />

1 On the control panel, press Password/System Settings.<br />

Either the System Administrator Menu screen or System Administrator – Password Entry screen will<br />

be displayed.<br />

If the System Administrator Menu screen is displayed, proceed to step 2.<br />

System Administrator Menu<br />

If the System Administrator – Password Entry screen is displayed, see “5.2.1 Entering the System<br />

Administration Mode” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on entering the<br />

password.<br />

<br />

2 On the screen, select System Settings.<br />

System Administrator Menu<br />

The System Settings screen is displayed.<br />

<strong>User</strong> Mode System Settings<br />

<br />

<br />

<strong>User</strong> Mode System Settings


3 Select Setup Menu.<br />

System Settings<br />

System Settings<br />

Auditron<br />

Administration<br />

The Setup Menu screen is displayed.<br />

4 Select Mailbox.<br />

Setup Menu<br />

Mailbox<br />

The Mailbox screen is displayed.<br />

Setup Menu<br />

5 Select the preferred box, followed by Create/Delete.<br />

Mailbox not in use yet will be displayed as “(Not in Use)”.<br />

Mailbox<br />

No. Mailbox Name<br />

001 (Not in Use)<br />

002 (Not in Use)<br />

003 (Not in Use)<br />

004 (Not in Use)<br />

005 (Not in Use)<br />

The Mailbox – Assign Password screen is displayed.<br />

Mailbox - Assign Password<br />

Off<br />

On<br />

Password<br />

Cancel<br />

1.4 Configuring for Using Mailbox<br />

Close<br />

System Administrator<br />

Password<br />

Close<br />

Close<br />

Go to<br />

(001 - 200)<br />

Create/Delete<br />

Save<br />

Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 1<br />

129


Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 1<br />

130<br />

1.4 Configuring for Using Mailbox<br />

6 Set the password.<br />

■When setting password<br />

1 Select On.<br />

2 Using the numeric keypad, enter a password within 20 characters, and<br />

then select Save.<br />

1<br />

The Mailbox xxx – Create/Delete screen is displayed. xxx refers to the mailbox<br />

number.<br />

The entered password will be displayed as “∗”. To correct a wrongly entered value, press the C button<br />

on the control panel, and then re-enter.<br />

Mailbox - Assign Password<br />

Off<br />

On<br />

■When not setting password<br />

Select Off and then Save.<br />

Password<br />

Cancel<br />

The Mailbox xxx – Create/Delete screen is displayed. xxx refers to the mailbox<br />

number.<br />

7 If necessary, configure the settings for Mailbox Name, Check Password<br />

and Delete/Save Documents. Select the option to be set, followed by<br />

Change Settings. Select Save once the settings are done.<br />

Mailbox 001 - Create/Delete<br />

Items Current Settings<br />

1. Mailbox Name<br />

(Not Set)<br />

2. Password<br />

On<br />

3. Check Password<br />

Always<br />

4. Delete/Save Documents Delete<br />

Save<br />

Close<br />

Delete Mailbox<br />

Change<br />

Settings


■Mailbox Name<br />

Sets the name of the mailbox. Up to 10 characters can be used.<br />

The display might differ according to the ROM versions.<br />

Alphanumeric<br />

Symbol<br />

a b c d e f g<br />

h j j k l m n<br />

o p q r s<br />

v w x<br />

Cancel<br />

1.4 Configuring for Using Mailbox<br />

● Entering alphanumeric character: Select Alphanumeric and then the characters.<br />

Selecting Shift will change the display<br />

to capital or small letters.<br />

● Entering symbol: Select Symbol and then the character, followed<br />

by Save.<br />

● Entering space: Select Space.<br />

● Deleting one character: Select Backspace.<br />

■Check Password<br />

Sets whether to check password for every sending and retrieving of faxes in the<br />

mailbox when the password has been set.<br />

3. Check Password<br />

Save<br />

(Write)<br />

Print/Delete<br />

(Read)<br />

Always<br />

y z<br />

t u<br />

1 2<br />

4 5<br />

7 8<br />

● Save (Write): Select this if you want a password to be entered<br />

when selecting a mailbox.<br />

● Print/Delete (Read): Select this if you want a password to be entered<br />

when printing/deleting mailbox document.<br />

● Always: Select this if you want a password to be entered<br />

when processing both of the above actions.<br />

0<br />

3<br />

6<br />

9<br />

Cancel<br />

The user will be required to enter the password<br />

when certain operations are selected.<br />

In order for this feature to function, you need to<br />

set the System Administrator Password to On.<br />

If not, the user password entry screen will not be<br />

displayed.<br />

Save<br />

Backspace<br />

Space<br />

Shift<br />

Save<br />

Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 1<br />

131


Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 1<br />

132<br />

1.4 Configuring for Using Mailbox<br />

■Delete/Save Documents<br />

Sets whether to delete documents when they have been retrieved from the mailbox<br />

and printed.<br />

4. Delete/Save Documents<br />

Save<br />

Delete<br />

● Save: Select this to save the document and the document<br />

is not deleted.<br />

● Delete: Select this to delete the document.<br />

8 Check the selection on the Mailbox 001 - Create/Delete screen and<br />

then select Close.<br />

The Mailbox screen is displayed.<br />

Delete documents from the Mailbox once<br />

they have been retrieved by an external<br />

source or after printing.<br />

Mailbox 001 - Create/Delete<br />

Items Current Setting<br />

1. Mailbox Name<br />

report<br />

2. Password<br />

On<br />

3. Check Password<br />

Always<br />

4. Delete/Save Documents Delete<br />

Cancel<br />

9 Select Close repeatedly until the System Settings screen is displayed.<br />

10 Select Close.<br />

The unit will exit the System Administration Mode.<br />

Save<br />

Close<br />

Delete Mailbox<br />

Change<br />

Settings


1.5<br />

Configuring for Using Job<br />

Template<br />

To scan with Job Template, configure the following settings on this machine:<br />

● set IP address.<br />

● activate FTP client for using Job Template.<br />

1.5.1 Setting IP Address<br />

For details on setting IP address, see “1.3 Setting IP Address” (P. 13) in “Part 1<br />

<strong>Printer</strong>”.<br />

If an IP address has already been set for the printing function, you do not need to<br />

do any setting here.<br />

1.5.2 Activating FTP Client<br />

The following procedure describes how to set the FTP client for using Job Template<br />

to Enabled (default: Disabled).<br />

You can activate the port by using either the System Administration Mode<br />

through the touch panel display or the CentreWare Internet Services.<br />

● “Chapter 5 System Administration Mode Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong><br />

(Copier) for details on System Administration Mode.<br />

● “5.6.1 Port Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on the ports that<br />

can be set.<br />

● “Chapter 5 Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)” (P. 105) in “Part 1<br />

<strong>Printer</strong>” for details on CentreWare Internet Services.<br />

The following describes the procedure of using System Administration Mode as<br />

an example.<br />

Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment<br />

1<br />

133


Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 1<br />

134<br />

1.5 Configuring for Using Job Template<br />

Procedure<br />

1 On the control panel, press Password/System Settings.<br />

Either the System Administrator Menu screen or System Administrator – Password Entry screen will<br />

be displayed.<br />

If the System Administrator Menu screen is displayed, proceed to step 2.<br />

System Administrator Menu<br />

If the System Administrator – Password Entry screen is displayed, see “5.2.1 Entering the System<br />

Administration Mode” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on entering the<br />

password.<br />

<br />

2 On the screen, select System Settings.<br />

System Administrator Menu<br />

The System Settings screen is displayed.<br />

<strong>User</strong> Mode System Settings<br />

<br />

<br />

<strong>User</strong> Mode System Settings


3 Select System Settings.<br />

System Settings<br />

System Settings<br />

Auditron<br />

Administration<br />

The System Settings screen is displayed.<br />

4 Select Network Settings.<br />

System Settings<br />

The Network Settings screen is displayed.<br />

5 Select Port Settings.<br />

The Port Settings screen is displayed.<br />

Setup Menu<br />

1.5 Configuring for Using Job Template<br />

Close<br />

System Administrator<br />

Password<br />

Close<br />

Common Settings Copy Mode Settings Network Settings<br />

Print Mode Settings<br />

<br />

Scan Mode Settings<br />

<br />

<br />

Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 1<br />

135


Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 1<br />

136<br />

1.5 Configuring for Using Job Template<br />

6 Select to display the next screen, and check Current Settings for<br />

FTP Client on the screen.<br />

If it is Enabled, there is no need to do any setting. Proceed to step 11.<br />

Port Settings<br />

Items Current Settings<br />

6. EtherTalk<br />

Disabled<br />

7. Salutation<br />

Disabled<br />

8. Port 9100<br />

Disabled<br />

9. SNMP<br />

Disabled<br />

10. FTP Client Disabled<br />

For the remaining steps, FTP Client is assumed to be Disabled in this example.<br />

7 Select FTP Client and then Change Settings.<br />

Port Settings<br />

Items Current Settings<br />

6. EtherTalk<br />

Disabled<br />

7. Salutation<br />

Disabled<br />

8. Port 9100<br />

Disabled<br />

9. SNMP<br />

Disabled<br />

10. FTP Client Disabled<br />

The FTP Client screen is displayed.<br />

8 Select Port Status and then Change Settings.<br />

FTP Client<br />

Items Current Settings<br />

1. Port Status Disabled<br />

The FTP Client - Port Status screen is displayed.<br />

2/3<br />

2/3<br />

Close<br />

Change<br />

Settings<br />

Close<br />

Change<br />

Settings<br />

Close<br />

Change<br />

Settings


9 Select Enable and then Save.<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

The FTP Client screen is displayed.<br />

1.5 Configuring for Using Job Template<br />

10 Check that Current Settings for Port Status is Enabled and then select<br />

Close.<br />

FTP Client<br />

Items Current Settings<br />

1. Port Status Enabled<br />

The Port Settings screen is displayed.<br />

<br />

11 Select Close repeatedly until the System Settings screen is displayed.<br />

12 Select Close.<br />

The machine will reboot and the display will return to the previous screen prior to this procedure.<br />

Press the Features button on the control panel, and then on the screen, check that Scan is displayed on<br />

the Menu screen.<br />

<br />

Close<br />

Change<br />

Settings<br />

Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 1<br />

137


Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 138<br />

1<br />

1.6<br />

Configuring Computer<br />

You need to do the following settings on the computer to export the scanned document to<br />

the computer.<br />

● Using mailbox<br />

● Using Job Template<br />

1.6.1 Using Mailbox<br />

In order to retrieve scanned document, install the scanner driver on the computer.<br />

For details on the operating environment of the scanner driver and the installation<br />

method, see “1.7 Installing the Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility” (P. 139).<br />

1.6.2 Using Job Template<br />

For CentreWare Scanning Services<br />

For details on the operating environment of the optional CentreWare Scanning<br />

Services and the installation method, refer to CentreWare Scanning Services<br />

Installation <strong>Guide</strong>.<br />

For CentreWare Internet Services<br />

The following settings are necessary to scan by using CentreWare Internet Services.<br />

● FTP server<br />

Register a user account that can be accessed from the client PC.<br />

● Client PC<br />

Set up the client PC so that it can use TCP/IP.<br />

● Creating a job template and setting the FTP destination (repository)<br />

CentreWare Internet Services help for details on how to create job templates and how to set the FTP<br />

destination (repository). You can display help by selecting Job Templates in the CentreWare Internet<br />

Services screen and then clicking on help.<br />

You can also enable the Cookie setting on the Web.


1.7<br />

Installing the Network<br />

<strong>Scanner</strong> Utility<br />

Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility is the software which allows you to access stored data in the mailbox<br />

from a personal computer. This section describes the installation and uninstallation of<br />

the network scanner utility using the PCL Driver/Network Utility (Windows ® ) CD-ROM.<br />

CentreWare Scanning Services Installation <strong>Guide</strong> for details on the operating environment of CentreWare Scanning<br />

Services (option) and the installation method.<br />

1.7.1 Required Environment<br />

To install the Network <strong>Scanner</strong> utility, a personal computer must meet all the following<br />

requirements:<br />

■Target Operation System<br />

The following operation systems are compatible with the utility:<br />

● Microsoft ® Windows ® 95/Windows ® 98/Windows ® Me operating system<br />

● Microsoft ® Windows NT ® operating system Version 4.0/Windows ® 2000/<br />

Windows ® XP operating system<br />

Windows NT 4.0 Server TSE (Terminal Server Edition) and Windows 2000 Server/Advanced Server<br />

Terminal Service are not compatible with this feature.<br />

■Personal Computer<br />

The target computer must meet all the following requirements:<br />

● Running i486DX4/100 MHz processor or above (Pentium 100 MHz or above is<br />

recommended)<br />

● 32 Mbyte memory or more<br />

● 40 Mbyte or more of free hard disk space (not including the space for storing<br />

scanned data)<br />

■Network<br />

A personal computer has to be connected to a network and be able to communicate<br />

with the TCP/IP protocol.<br />

See the manuals of the respective OS to confirm and add protocol setting on the computer.<br />

■Target Application Software<br />

To import the data stored in the mailbox to an application software, the software<br />

must be compatible with the TWAIN interface.<br />

Regarding the compatibility of application software with the network scanner driver, see the Network<br />

<strong>Scanner</strong> Driver Readme.txt in the PCL Driver/Network Utility CD-ROM.<br />

Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment<br />

1<br />

139


Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 1<br />

140<br />

1.7 Installing the Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility<br />

1.7.2 Installation<br />

Procedure<br />

The Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility includes the following two softwares:<br />

● Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Driver<br />

Scan driver to import the data stored in the mailbox of the machine to the software compatible with<br />

TWAIN.<br />

● Mailbox Viewer<br />

Software to check, import or delete the data stored in the mailbox of the machine.<br />

You can install both software at a time following the installation procedure below:<br />

1 Click Start and then click Run.<br />

The Run dialog box will be displayed.<br />

2 Insert the PCL Driver/Network Utility CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.<br />

Type the drive name (e.g. E:) and the path name (\English\Utility\<br />

Win9x_Me\SCN\Disk1\Setup, \English\Utility\NT40\SCN\Disk1\Setup<br />

or \English\Utility\Win2000\SCN\Disk1\Setup), then click OK. The drive<br />

name may be different depending on your system (personal computer).


3 Click Next and continue with the installation.<br />

1.7 Installing the Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility<br />

4 When the installation is completed, the following dialog box appears.<br />

Click “Yes, I want to restart my computer now.”, then Finish.<br />

The installation is completed and the Windows restarts automatically.<br />

Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 1<br />

141


Setting <strong>Scanner</strong> Environment 1<br />

142<br />

1.7 Installing the Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility<br />

1.7.3 Uninstallation<br />

Procedure<br />

This section describes the procedure to remove the Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility<br />

installed in Microsoft Windows.<br />

When upgrading the network scanner utility, make sure you uninstall the existing network scanner<br />

utility.<br />

1 Double-click My Computer, Control Panel, then Add/Remove Programs.<br />

2 Click <strong>Fuji</strong> <strong>Xerox</strong> Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility, then Add/Remove.<br />

3 Click Yes.<br />

The uninstallation is completed.


2Documents for<br />

Scanning<br />

2.1 About Documents .......................................................................... 144<br />

2.1.1 Suitable Document Sizes................................................ 144<br />

2.1.2 Automatic Document Size Sensing ................................ 145<br />

2.1.3 Special Documents to Note ............................................ 145<br />

2.2 Loading Documents ....................................................................... 147<br />

2.2.1 On Document Glass ....................................................... 147<br />

2.2.2 In DADF .......................................................................... 148<br />

2.2.3 Document Orientation..................................................... 149<br />

2.2.4 Scanning in Batches....................................................... 150


Documents for Scanning 144<br />

2<br />

2.1<br />

About Documents<br />

You can load documents either on the document glass or in the Duplex Automatic Document<br />

Feeder (DADF).<br />

When installed, the DADF can be used to allow multiple sheets of documents to be loaded.<br />

This section describes the types of documents that can be placed on the document glass or<br />

loaded in the DADF.<br />

2.1.1 Suitable Document Sizes<br />

The document sizes that can be loaded on the document glass or in the DADF<br />

are as follows:<br />

Suitable<br />

document size<br />

Document Glass DADF<br />

Minimum: 15 × 15 mm<br />

Maximum: 334.5 × 452 mm<br />

Scan area 297 × 432 mm<br />

Document weight<br />

(G.S.M.* 1 )<br />

Loading capacity<br />

(sheets)<br />

Minimum: 148.5 × 210 mm<br />

(A5 )<br />

Maximum: 297 × 432 mm<br />

(A3, 11 × 17")<br />

- 1-sided document: 38 – 128 g/m2 2-sided document* 2 : 50 – 110 g/m2 1 50 (38 – 100 g/m 2 )<br />

40 (101 – 128 g/m2 )<br />

*1 G.S.M. is a measure of the substance of one sheet of paper expressed in grams per<br />

square meter.<br />

*2 The value for scanning both sides of 2-sided document.


2.1.2 Automatic Document Size Sensing<br />

2.1 About Documents<br />

This machine will automatically detect the document size when scanning. For<br />

standard sizes in the table below, you do not need to specify the document size<br />

for scanning.<br />

Automatically detected<br />

document sizes<br />

For the following, the sizes on the left will be detected as sizes on the right:<br />

On document glass:<br />

For scanning documents of non-standard sizes, specify the document size in Scan Size on the Scan<br />

Options tab. For details on entering the document size, see “3.3.6 Scan Size” (P. 171).<br />

2.1.3 Special Documents to Note<br />

This section describes the special documents to note.<br />

Document glass<br />

Document glass DADF<br />

B6, B6 , B5, B5 , B4, A6, A5,<br />

A5 , A4, A4 , A3, 8.5×11" ,<br />

8.5×13", 8.5×14"<br />

● 8×10" → B5 ● 8.5×13" → A4<br />

● 8×10" → A4 ● 8.5×14" → A4<br />

● 8×10.5" → A4 ● 11×15" → A3<br />

B5, B5 , B4, A5 , A4, A4 ,<br />

A3, 8.5×11", 8.5×11" ,<br />

8.5×14", 11×17"<br />

● 8.5×11"* → A4 ● 11×17" → A3<br />

* For 8.5×11", the detected size can be changed according to the settings by the customer engineer.<br />

In DADF:<br />

● 11×15" → A3<br />

For the following types of documents, an error message about the document size<br />

not being detected automatically might be displayed or an image loss might<br />

occur.<br />

Resolve the problem by the suggested solution.<br />

Documents for Scanning 2<br />

145


146<br />

2.1 About Documents<br />

Documents for Scanning 2●<br />

DADF<br />

Document Solution<br />

Document of non-standard<br />

size<br />

Glossy documents<br />

Thick documents<br />

(e.g. booklets)<br />

Highly transparent documents<br />

(e.g. transparencies)<br />

Torn, wrinkled, punched or<br />

curled documents<br />

Specify the document size in Scan Size on the Scan Options<br />

tab.<br />

Place a piece of white paper of the same size on top of the<br />

document. Alternatively, specify the document size in Scan<br />

Size on the Scan Options tab.<br />

Do not load very wet documents. Water might leak to the internal part of the machine causing<br />

machine breakdown.<br />

● Do not load documents heavier than 5 kg. You may break the document glass and the machine.<br />

Documents in photo albums might not be scanned correctly due to the wavy condition of the film.<br />

“3.3.6 Scan Size” (P. 171) for details on entering the document size.<br />

The following types of documents might be jammed or spoilt if loaded in the<br />

DADF. Place them on the document glass.<br />

● documents with folded lines ● torn, wrinkled, punched or curled documents<br />

● glossy documents (e.g. photos) ● clipped, stapled or glued documents<br />

● cut and pasted documents ● documents with coating or carbon on the reverse<br />

side<br />

● thick documents ● highly transparent documents (e.g. transparencies)<br />

● lightweight documents ● heat-sensitive documents


2.2<br />

Loading Documents<br />

This section describes the procedure of loading documents.<br />

2.2.1 On Document Glass<br />

Procedure<br />

The following procedure describes how to load document on the document<br />

glass.<br />

1 Open the document cover.<br />

2 Place the document facing down and<br />

align it against the upper left corner of<br />

the document glass.<br />

Place a sheet of white paper on top of highly transparent<br />

documents like transparencies or tracing paper.<br />

3 Close the document cover.<br />

● When scanning thick documents, do<br />

not use excessive force to press it<br />

against the document glass. The<br />

glass may break and injure you.<br />

● Avoid looking at the copy lamp<br />

directly when scanning with the document<br />

cover open. It may strain or<br />

hurt your eyes.<br />

Documents for Scanning<br />

2<br />

147


Documents for Scanning 2<br />

148<br />

2.2 Loading Documents<br />

2.2.2 In DADF<br />

Procedure<br />

The DADF allows you to load up to 50 sheets of documents from 148.5 × 210<br />

mm to 297 × 432 mm. The loaded documents will be scanned from the topmost<br />

sheet down and then output with the scanned side facing down. The following<br />

procedure describes how to load documents in the DADF.<br />

Up to 40 sheets of heavyweight (101 – 128 g/m 2 ) can be loaded.<br />

1 Align the edges of the documents.<br />

Remove any clips or staples attached to the documents.<br />

When loading large documents, pull out the extension tray.<br />

2 Place the documents facing up (side<br />

one facing up for 2-sided documents),<br />

aligned to the inner corner of the<br />

DADF, and in the direction of the<br />

arrow.<br />

The confirmation indicator lights up.<br />

Usually, load the documents in the Head to Left setting.<br />

The scanned documents will be retrieved as Head<br />

to Top setting on the computer.<br />

3 Shift the document guide to gently<br />

touch the edge of the document.<br />

Avoid the following actions to prevent jamming or<br />

damaging your documents:<br />

● Do not hold on to documents when they are being<br />

fed into the feeder.<br />

● Do not allow the output documents to over-stack on<br />

the document output tray.<br />

● Do not place any object on the document output tray.


Mixed size documents<br />

2.2 Loading Documents<br />

Documents of different sizes can be loaded together. To do this, align the documents<br />

against the inner corner of the DADF, and set Mixed Size Originals on the<br />

Scan Options tab to On before scanning. If this option is not selected before<br />

scanning, it will cause the document to jam.<br />

For details, see “3.3.5 Mixed Size Originals” (P. 168).<br />

2.2.3 Document Orientation<br />

When the DADF has been installed and used for scanning, you have to set Original<br />

Orientation in order to specify the “Head” position of the document.<br />

For Original Orientation of 2 Sided Originals, select either Head to Top or Head<br />

to Left.<br />

Usually, load the documents in the “Head to Left” orientation. The scanned documents<br />

will be retrieved as “Head to Top” orientation on the computer.<br />

When retrieving 2-sided documents, check if the image is set in the orientation<br />

defined in Original Orientation.<br />

● Head to Left<br />

● Head to Top<br />

“3.3.4 Original Orientation” (P. 166) for details on Original Orientation.<br />

Documents for Scanning 2<br />

149


Documents for Scanning 2<br />

150<br />

2.2 Loading Documents<br />

2.2.4 Scanning in Batches<br />

Procedure<br />

When there is another batch of documents to be scanned after the first batch has<br />

been done, select the Next Original button on the screen displayed on the touch<br />

panel display while scanning, so as to prepare the machine for the next batch of<br />

documents waiting to be scanned. Multiple documents can be scanned as one<br />

piece of data. Up to 999 pages can be stored.<br />

When the pages of the scanning documents are beyond the maximum storable amount of pages, scanning<br />

is aborted. Select whether to stop scanning or restart scanning according to the message displayed.<br />

The maximum storable amount of pages can be changed. For more details, see “5.8.6 Others (Scan<br />

Mode Settings)” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier).<br />

1 Select Next Original while scanning the document.<br />

Scan Job :Doc. No. 00048<br />

Save in : Mailbox001 - report<br />

Pages : 1<br />

A 3<br />

Full Color JPEG<br />

300dpi / 100%<br />

● When using the DADF, wait until the machine has completed scanning the first batch of documents<br />

before loading the next batch.<br />

● If no action is carried out after the above screen has been displayed for some time, the machine will<br />

reboot automatically with the assumption that there are no more documents to be scanned. You can<br />

change the default value of this auto clear time in the System Administration Mode. For details on<br />

the way to change, see “5.4.1 Machine Clock/Timers” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong><br />

(Copier). The default value is 60 (seconds).<br />

2 Load the next batch of documents.<br />

Stop<br />

Last Original<br />

Next Original<br />

Close


2.2 Loading Documents<br />

3 Press Start.<br />

When there are more batches of documents, repeat the procedure of loading the documents and press<br />

the Start button.<br />

4 Select Last Original after all the documents have been scanned.<br />

Scan Job :Doc. No. 00048<br />

Save in : Mailbox 001 - report<br />

Pages : 1<br />

A 3<br />

Full Color JPEG<br />

300dpi / 100%<br />

Stop<br />

Last Original<br />

Next Original<br />

Start<br />

Close<br />

Documents for Scanning 2<br />

151


3Scanning With Mailbox<br />

3.1 How to Scan................................................................................... 154<br />

3.2 Canceling Scanning/Checking Job Status ..................................... 156<br />

3.2.1 Canceling Scanning From This Machine ........................ 156<br />

3.2.2 Canceling Scanning From Computer.............................. 158<br />

3.2.3 Checking Job Status of Scan Instruction........................ 158<br />

3.3 Configuring Scan Settings ............................................................. 160<br />

3.3.1 Output Color ................................................................... 160<br />

3.3.2 Scan Resolution.............................................................. 162<br />

3.3.3 2 Sided Originals ............................................................ 163<br />

3.3.4 Original Orientation......................................................... 166<br />

3.3.5 Mixed Size Originals ....................................................... 168<br />

3.3.6 Scan Size........................................................................ 171<br />

3.3.7 Reduce/Enlarge.............................................................. 174<br />

3.3.8 Bound Originals .............................................................. 177<br />

3.3.9 Border Erase................................................................... 180<br />

3.3.10 Original Type................................................................... 183<br />

3.3.11 Lighter/Darker/Contrast .................................................. 185<br />

3.3.12 Auto Exposure ................................................................ 187<br />

3.3.13 Image Compression........................................................ 189<br />

3.3.14 File Format...................................................................... 191<br />

3.4 Importing Scanned Data to Computer ........................................... 194<br />

3.4.1 Importing to Application Program ................................... 194<br />

3.4.2 Importing From Mailbox Viewer ...................................... 199<br />

3.4.3 Importing Mailbox Data Using CentreWare Internet Services<br />

............................................................................... 201<br />

3.5 Checking/Deleting Scanned Data in Mailbox ................................. 203<br />

3.5.1 Checking/Deleting on This Machine ............................... 203<br />

3.5.2 Checking/Deleting on Computer (Mailbox Viewer) ......... 206<br />

3.6 Changing Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility Settings ................................... 208<br />

3.6.1 Changing Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Driver Settings ................... 208<br />

3.6.2 Changing Mailbox Viewer Settings ................................. 212


Scanning With Mailbox 154<br />

3<br />

3.1<br />

How to Scan<br />

Using this machine, you can scan the document, and then save the scanned data in the<br />

mailbox. The scanned data can be saved as JPEG or TIFF file format.<br />

This section describes the basic flow of scanning.<br />

To use this machine for scanning, you need to set the IP address, enable the port, and create the mailbox beforehand.<br />

For details on these settings, see “1.4 Configuring for Using Mailbox” (P. 122).<br />

Procedure<br />

1 Load the document to be scanned.<br />

“2.2 Loading Documents” (P. 147) for details on loading documents.<br />

2 Display the Basic Scanning screen.<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Scan Options<br />

3 Under Save to, select Mailbox.<br />

The Mailbox screen is displayed.<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

Menu<br />

Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />

Auto 200dpi<br />

1 Sided<br />

Mailbox... Full Color<br />

300dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to H)<br />

Grayscale<br />

400dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to T)<br />

Job Template... Black<br />

600dpi<br />

More...<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Scan Options<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

Menu<br />

Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />

Auto 200dpi<br />

1 Sided<br />

Mailbox... Full Color<br />

300dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to H)<br />

Grayscale<br />

400dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to T)<br />

Job Template... Black<br />

600dpi<br />

More...


3.1 How to Scan<br />

4 Select the mailbox for saving the scanned data.<br />

Selecting the button will display the previous screen and the button the next screen. You can<br />

use the numeric keypad on the control panel to enter the mailbox number directly at Go to.<br />

Mailbox Close<br />

001 002 003 004<br />

K Mailbox H Mailbox H Mailbox<br />

(Not in Use)<br />

005 006 007<br />

008<br />

(Not in Use) (Not in Use) (Not in Use) (Not in Use)<br />

009 010 011 012<br />

(Not in Use) (Not in Use)<br />

(Not in Use) (Not in Use)<br />

If there are documents in the mailbox, the number of documents saved in the mailbox will be displayed<br />

on the bottom right of the screen in No. of Docs: once the mailbox is selected.<br />

● If the password has been set, the screen to enter the password will appear. Enter the password and<br />

then select the Confirm button. If you have forgotten the mailbox password, reset it in the System<br />

Administration Mode.<br />

● Selecting the mailbox and the Document List button will enable you to check documents saved in<br />

the mailbox. After checking, select the Close button.<br />

5 Select Close.<br />

The display will return to the Basic Scanning screen.<br />

6 If necessary, configure the scan settings.<br />

(001 - 200)<br />

“3.3 Configuring Scan Settings” (P. 160) for details on configuring the scan settings.<br />

7 Press Start.<br />

Scanning of the document will begin and the scanned data will be saved in the specified mailbox.<br />

Go to<br />

Document List<br />

Mailbox Close<br />

001 002 003 004<br />

K Mailbox H Mailbox H Mailbox<br />

005 006 007<br />

(Not in Use)<br />

(Not in Use)<br />

009 010 011 012<br />

(Not in Use) (Not in Use)<br />

(Not in Use)<br />

(Not in Use)<br />

008<br />

(Not in Use)<br />

(Not in Use) (Not in Use)<br />

Go to<br />

(001 - 200)<br />

Document List<br />

No. of Docs: 10<br />

Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

155


Scanning With Mailbox 156<br />

3<br />

3.2<br />

Canceling Scanning/<br />

Checking Job Status<br />

This section describes how to cancel scanning and check the status of scan jobs in process.<br />

Once scanning is canceled, the scan data already saved in the mailbox will also be deleted.<br />

3.2.1 Canceling Scanning From This Machine<br />

Procedure<br />

The procedure to cancel scanning from this machine is as follows.<br />

If the following screen does not appear, refer to the procedure on the next page,<br />

“ Canceling scan jobs in this machine” (P. 157).<br />

1 Either press Stop on the control panel or select Stop on the following<br />

screen.<br />

Scan Job :Doc. No. 00048<br />

Close<br />

Pages : 1<br />

A 3<br />

Full Color JPEG<br />

300dpi / 100%<br />

The machine will pause and display the following screen.<br />

2 To stop scanning, either press C on the control panel or select Stop on<br />

the following screen. However, the page in the midst of scanning will be<br />

scanned.<br />

Scan Job<br />

Save in : Mailbox001 - report<br />

Pages : 1<br />

A 3<br />

Full Color JPEG<br />

300dpi / 100%<br />

:Doc. No. 00048<br />

To continue scanning, either press the Start button on the control panel or select the Start button on<br />

the screen.<br />

Stop<br />

Last Original<br />

Next Original<br />

Stop<br />

Last Original<br />

Next Original<br />

Start<br />

Close


Canceling scan jobs in this machine<br />

Procedure<br />

3.2 Canceling Scanning/Checking Job Status<br />

The procedure to cancel scan jobs received by the machine is as follows:<br />

1 On the control panel, press Job Status.<br />

The Job Status screen is displayed.<br />

2 On the screen, select Current and Pending Jobs.<br />

Job Status<br />

Current and<br />

Pending Jobs<br />

A list of jobs in process or waiting will be displayed.<br />

3 Select the job that you want to delete.<br />

Job Status<br />

The job status will be displayed.<br />

Completed Jobs<br />

4 Either press Stop on the control panel or select Stop on the following<br />

screen.<br />

The machine will pause and display the following screen.<br />

Stored<br />

Documents<br />

Secure Print Sample Print Delayed Print<br />

Private Mailbox<br />

Current and<br />

Pending Jobs<br />

Completed Jobs<br />

Stored<br />

Documents<br />

Doc. No. - Job Type Status Remote Terminal/Contents Pages<br />

00010-Print Job Print Wait <strong>User</strong> Imari: Host 0/100<br />

00005-Scan Job Scanning Mailbox 001<br />

3<br />

Print<br />

Waiting Jobs<br />

Scan Job :Doc. No. 00048<br />

Close<br />

Pages : 1<br />

A 3<br />

Full Color JPEG<br />

300dpi / 100%<br />

Stop<br />

Last Original<br />

Next Original<br />

Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

157


Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

158<br />

3.2 Canceling Scanning/Checking Job Status<br />

5 To stop scanning, either press C on the control panel or select Stop on<br />

the following screen. However, the page in the midst of scanning will be<br />

scanned.<br />

To continue scanning, either press the Start button on the control panel or select the Start button on the<br />

screen.<br />

6 Select Close.<br />

Repeat steps 2 to 5 if you have other jobs to delete.<br />

3.2.2 Canceling Scanning From Computer<br />

You can use CentreWare Internet Services to cancel scanning from the computer.<br />

The Help file displayed by clicking the Help button on the bottom frame of CentreWare Internet Services<br />

screen for details on using CentreWare Internet Services.<br />

3.2.3 Checking Job Status of Scan Instruction<br />

The procedure to check the status of job in the process of scanning is as follows:<br />

Using this machine<br />

Procedure<br />

Scan Job<br />

Save in : Mailbox001 - report<br />

Pages : 1<br />

A 3<br />

Full Color JPEG<br />

300dpi / 100%<br />

:Doc. No. 00048<br />

1 On the control panel, press Job Status.<br />

The Job Status screen is displayed.<br />

Stop<br />

Last Original<br />

Next Original<br />

Start<br />

Close


3.2 Canceling Scanning/Checking Job Status<br />

2 On the screen, select either Current and Pending Jobs or Completed<br />

Jobs.<br />

Job Status<br />

Current and<br />

Pending Jobs<br />

A list of jobs will be displayed.<br />

3 Check the job status.<br />

Job Status<br />

Completed Jobs<br />

For example, if a job in process is selected, the following screen will be displayed.<br />

4 After checking, press Features on the control panel.<br />

Using CentreWare Internet Services<br />

Stored<br />

Documents<br />

Secure Print Sample Print Delayed Print<br />

Private Mailbox<br />

Current and<br />

Pending Jobs<br />

Completed Jobs<br />

Stored<br />

Documents<br />

Doc. No. - Job Type Status Remote Terminal/Contents Pages<br />

00010-Print Job Print Wait <strong>User</strong> Imari: Host 0/100<br />

00005-Scan Job Scanning Mailbox 001<br />

3<br />

Scan Job<br />

Save in : Mailbox001 - report<br />

Pages : 1<br />

A 3<br />

Full Color JPEG<br />

300dpi / 100%<br />

:Doc. No. 00048<br />

Print<br />

Waiting Jobs<br />

You can also use CentreWare Internet Services to check job status of scan jobs.<br />

See “Chapter 5 Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)”<br />

(P. 105) in “Part 1 <strong>Printer</strong>” for details on CentreWare Internet Services.<br />

Stop<br />

Last Original<br />

Next Original<br />

Close<br />

Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

159


Scanning With Mailbox 160<br />

3<br />

3.3<br />

Configuring Scan Settings<br />

This section describes the scan settings for scanning.<br />

The following scan settings are available:<br />

● Output Color<br />

● Scan Resolution<br />

● 2 Sided Originals (available only if DADF is attached)<br />

● Scan Size<br />

● Mixed Size Originals (available only if DADF is attached)<br />

● Reduce/Enlarge<br />

● Bound Originals<br />

● Border Erase<br />

● Original Type<br />

● Lighter/Darker/Contrast<br />

● Auto Exposure<br />

● Image Compression<br />

● File Format<br />

Configure the required scan settings according to the following procedures:<br />

3.3.1 Output Color<br />

You can set the output color for scanning the document.<br />

The options available for output color are as follows:<br />

● Auto<br />

Select this to detect the color of the document automatically so that color document will be scanned<br />

in full color and black/white document in black/white.<br />

● Full Color<br />

Select this when scanning color documents. It can reproduce text in office documents clearly or gradations<br />

in color faithfully.<br />

● Grayscale<br />

Select this when scanning in grayscale. It can also reproduce faithfully the shades in black and white<br />

as well as the mid tones of gradation. It is suitable for shades which cannot be expressed in black<br />

and white only.<br />

● Black<br />

Select this when scanning black and white documents. Then, select the Original Type for black and<br />

white documents as described in “3.3.10 Original Type” (P. 183)<br />

● You can change the default value of Output Color in the System Administration Mode. For details<br />

on the way to change, see “5.8 Scan Mode Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong><br />

(Copier). The default is set as Black.<br />

● Scan resolution might differ according to the installed memory capacity. For details, contact our<br />

Customer Support Center.


Procedure<br />

1 Load the document to be scanned.<br />

“2.2 Loading Documents” (P. 147) for details on loading documents.<br />

2 Display the Basic Scanning screen.<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Scan Options<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

3 Select the mailbox for saving the scanned data.<br />

“3.1 How to Scan” (P. 154) for details on selecting the mailbox.<br />

3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

4 Select the output color option from Output Color on the Basic Scanning<br />

screen.<br />

5 If necessary, configure other scan settings.<br />

6 Press Start.<br />

Scanning of the document will begin and the scanned data will be saved in the specified mailbox.<br />

Menu<br />

Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />

Auto 200dpi<br />

1 Sided<br />

Mailbox... Full Color<br />

300dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to H)<br />

Grayscale<br />

400dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to T)<br />

Job Template... Black<br />

600dpi<br />

More...<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Scan Options<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

Menu<br />

Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />

Auto 200dpi<br />

1 Sided<br />

Mailbox... Full Color<br />

300dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to H)<br />

Grayscale<br />

400dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to T)<br />

Job Template... Black<br />

600dpi<br />

More...<br />

Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

161


Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

162<br />

3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

3.3.2 Scan Resolution<br />

Procedure<br />

You can set the scan resolution for scanning the document.<br />

The options available for scan resolution are as follows. The larger the value, the<br />

finer the scan but the data size will become bigger.<br />

● 200 dpi<br />

● 300 dpi<br />

● 400 dpi<br />

● 600 dpi<br />

● For data that is larger, the processing of scanning and data transferring might be slower.<br />

● You can change the default value of Scan Resolution in the System Administration Mode. For<br />

details on the way to change, see “5.8 Scan Mode Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong><br />

<strong>Guide</strong> (Copier). The default is set as 200dpi.<br />

● Scan resolution might differ according to the installed memory capacity. For details, contact our<br />

Customer Support Center.<br />

1 Load the document to be scanned.<br />

“2.2 Loading Documents” (P. 147) for details on loading documents.<br />

2 Display the Basic Scanning screen.<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Scan Options<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

3 Select the mailbox for saving the scanned data.<br />

“3.1 How to Scan” (P. 154) for details on selecting the mailbox.<br />

Menu<br />

Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />

Auto 200dpi<br />

1 Sided<br />

Mailbox... Full Color<br />

300dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to H)<br />

Grayscale<br />

400dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to T)<br />

Job Template... Black<br />

600dpi<br />

More...


3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

4 Select the scan resolution option from Scan Resolution on the Basic<br />

Scanning screen.<br />

5 If necessary, configure other scan settings.<br />

6 Press Start.<br />

Scanning of the document will begin and the scanned data will be saved in the specified mailbox.<br />

3.3.3 2 Sided Originals<br />

Procedure<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Scan Options<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

When the DADF is attached, you can scan both sides of 2-sided documents<br />

automatically.<br />

When the binding location of the document is set, the top and bottom edges of both<br />

sides of the document will be arranged in the same direction and scanned.<br />

You cannot change the default value of 2 Sided Originals as it is fixed.<br />

1 Load the document to be scanned.<br />

“2.2 Loading Documents” (P. 147) for details on loading documents.<br />

2 Display the Basic Scanning screen.<br />

Menu<br />

Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />

Auto 200dpi<br />

1 Sided<br />

Mailbox... Full Color<br />

300dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to H)<br />

Grayscale<br />

400dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to T)<br />

Job Template... Black<br />

600dpi<br />

More...<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Scan Options<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

Menu<br />

Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />

Auto 200dpi<br />

1 Sided<br />

Mailbox... Full Color<br />

300dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to H)<br />

Grayscale<br />

400dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to T)<br />

Job Template... Black<br />

600dpi<br />

More...<br />

Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

163


Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

164<br />

3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

3 Select the mailbox for saving the scanned data.<br />

“3.1 How to Scan” (P. 154) for details on selecting the mailbox.<br />

4 Select 2 Sided (H to H) or 2 Sided (H to T) from 2 Sided Originals on<br />

the Basic Scanning screen.<br />

To specify the orientation and binding location of the documents, select<br />

More….<br />

■When More… has been selected:<br />

The 2 Sided Originals screen is displayed.<br />

1<br />

Select 1 Sided or 2 Sided.<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

2 If 2 Sided has been selected, select the desired item under Originals.<br />

If 1 Sided has been selected, proceed to step 3 .


3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

● Select the Head to Head button for documents with the top/bottom of the image in the same direction<br />

on both sides of the document.<br />

● Select the Head to Toe button for documents with the top/bottom of the image on one side in the<br />

opposite direction of the top/bottom of the image on the other side.<br />

3<br />

Check Original Orientation.<br />

Usually, load the documents in the Head to Left setting. The scanned<br />

documents will be retrieved as Head to Top orientation on the computer.<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

If the document is not loaded in the direction specified in Original Orientation, the Head of the document<br />

will be wrongly detected by the machine. For details on Original Orientation, see “3.3.4 Original<br />

Orientation” (P. 166).<br />

● When Original Orientation is set as Head to Top:<br />

● When Original Orientation is set as Head to Left:<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

165


Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

166<br />

3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

5 After checking the setting, select Save.<br />

The display will return to the Basic Scanning screen.<br />

6 If necessary, configure other scan settings.<br />

7 Press Start.<br />

Scanning of the document will begin and the scanned data will be saved in the specified mailbox.<br />

3.3.4 Original Orientation<br />

When the DADF is installed and used for scanning, you have to set Original Orientation<br />

in order to specify the Head position of the document.<br />

The options for Original Orientation are as follows:<br />

Usually, load the documents in the “Head to Left” orientation. The scanned documents<br />

will be retrieved as “Head to Top” orientation on the computer.<br />

● Head to Left<br />

Select this when you place the “Head” of the document at the left edge of the document glass or<br />

DADF. Always select this for documents placed with the Head at the left edge (with texts of the horizontal<br />

type).<br />

● Head to Top<br />

Select this when you place the “Head” of the document at the top edge of the document glass or<br />

DADF.<br />

● The orientation of the original document is not effected by the orientation of the scanned data.<br />

● You can change the default value of Original Orientation in the System Administration Mode. For<br />

details on the way to change, see “5.8 Scan Mode Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong><br />

<strong>Guide</strong> (Copier). The default is set as Head to Left.


Procedure<br />

1 Load the document to be scanned.<br />

“2.2 Loading Documents” (P. 147) for details on loading documents.<br />

2 Display the Basic Scanning screen.<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Scan Options<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

3 Select the mailbox for saving the scanned data.<br />

“3.1 How to Scan” (P. 154) for details on selecting the mailbox.<br />

3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

4 Select More… from 2 Sided Originals on the Basic Scanning screen.<br />

The 2 Sided Originals screen is displayed.<br />

5 Based on the orientation of the document loaded, select either Head to<br />

Top or Head to Left from Original Orientation.<br />

Menu<br />

Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />

Auto 200dpi<br />

1 Sided<br />

Mailbox... Full Color<br />

300dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to H)<br />

Grayscale<br />

400dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to T)<br />

Job Template... Black<br />

600dpi<br />

More...<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Scan Options<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

Menu<br />

Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />

Auto 200dpi<br />

1 Sided<br />

Mailbox... Full Color<br />

300dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to H)<br />

Grayscale<br />

400dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to T)<br />

Job Template... Black<br />

600dpi<br />

More...<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

167


Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

168<br />

3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

Usually, load the documents in the Head to Left orientation as shown in the following diagram.<br />

6 After checking the setting, select Save.<br />

The display will return to the Basic Scanning screen.<br />

7 If necessary, configure other scan settings.<br />

8 Press Start.<br />

Scanning of the document will begin and the scanned data will be saved in the specified mailbox.<br />

3.3.5 Mixed Size Originals<br />

When the DADF is installed and used for scanning, documents of different sizes<br />

can be scanned.<br />

The options available for Mixed Size Originals are as follows.<br />

● On<br />

Select this to automatically detect the different sizes when scanning documents of mixed sizes. For<br />

details on the sizes that can be detected automatically, see “2.1.2 Automatic Document Size Sensing”<br />

(P. 145).<br />

● Off<br />

Select this when scanning documents of the same size.<br />

When using the Mixed Size Originals feature, be sure to load A5-sized document in the portrait orientation<br />

( ). Loading it in the landscape orientation may cause the document to jam or machine breakdown.<br />

● You can change the default value of Mixed Size Originals in the System Administration Mode. For<br />

details on the way to change, see “5.8 Scan Mode Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong><br />

<strong>Guide</strong> (Copier). The default value is set as Off.<br />

● When you use this Mixed Size Originals feature, be sure to set Scan Size of the Scan Options screen<br />

to Auto Size Detect.<br />

● If Reduce/Enlarge on the Scan Options screen is set as Auto % and size is specified in Output Size,<br />

the documents will be automatically enlarged/reduced according to the specified size for scanning.<br />

● If the size cannot be automatically detected, an error message will prompt you to enter the document<br />

size.


Procedure<br />

1 Load documents in the Head to Left<br />

orientation with the edges A and B of<br />

the documents aligned at the top left<br />

corners.<br />

Remove any clips or staples attached to the documents.<br />

The documents might not be scanned correctly if<br />

their top left corners are not properly aligned.<br />

● Edge A of the document refers to the width of the edge<br />

that is being fed into the machine.<br />

2 Load all documents aligned to the<br />

inner edge of the DADF and the document<br />

guide.<br />

Align edge A of documents to the mouth of the<br />

feeder and adjust the document guide accordingly.<br />

“2.2.2 In DADF” (P. 148) for details on loading documents<br />

to the DADF.<br />

Be sure to align edge B of documents to the inner edge of<br />

the DADF. If the documents are not loaded correctly, it<br />

may cause the document to jam.<br />

3 Display the Basic Scanning screen.<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Scan Options<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

4 Select the mailbox for saving the scanned data.<br />

“3.1 How to Scan” (P. 154) for details on selecting the mailbox.<br />

3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

Menu<br />

Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />

Auto 200dpi<br />

1 Sided<br />

Mailbox... Full Color<br />

300dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to H)<br />

Grayscale<br />

400dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to T)<br />

Job Template... Black<br />

600dpi<br />

More...<br />

Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

169


Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

170<br />

3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

5 Check Scan Size on the Scan Options screen.<br />

■When Auto Size Detect is displayed:<br />

Proceed to step 6.<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

■When options other than Auto Size Detect are displayed:<br />

See “3.3.6 Scan Size” (P. 171) for details on setting Auto Size Detect.<br />

6 Select Mixed Size Originals on the Scan Options screen.<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

The Mixed Size Originals screen is displayed.<br />

7 Select On.<br />

Scan Options<br />

2 Sided Originals<br />

1 Sided<br />

Reduce/Enlarge<br />

100%<br />

Scan Options<br />

2 Sided Originals<br />

1 Sided<br />

Reduce/Enlarge<br />

100%<br />

Mixed Size Originals<br />

Off<br />

On<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

Scan Size<br />

Auto Size Detect<br />

Bound Originals<br />

Off<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

Scan Size<br />

Auto Size Detect<br />

Bound Originals<br />

Off<br />

Select On for this feature when<br />

copying originals of different<br />

sizes using the Document Feeder.<br />

8 After checking the setting, select Save.<br />

The display will return to the Basic Scanning screen.<br />

Cancel<br />

Menu<br />

Mixed Size Originals<br />

Off<br />

Border Erase<br />

: 2mm : 2mm<br />

: 0mm<br />

Menu<br />

Mixed Size Originals<br />

Off<br />

Border Erase<br />

: 2mm : 2mm<br />

: 0mm<br />

Save


3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

9 If necessary, configure other scan settings.<br />

10 Press Start.<br />

Scanning of the document will begin and the scanned data will be saved in the specified mailbox.<br />

3.3.6 Scan Size<br />

Procedure<br />

You can configure the scan size for scanning.<br />

Set the scan size when scanning documents of non-standard sizes or to a different<br />

size.<br />

If the scan size is set, scanning will be done according to the specified size<br />

regardless of the actual size of the document loaded.<br />

Options for setting scan size are as follows:<br />

● Auto Size Detect<br />

Detects the document size automatically.<br />

● Standard Sizes<br />

Choose from the 11 set sizes: A3 , A4 , A4 , A5 , B4 , B5 , 11×17" , 8.5×11" ,<br />

8.5×11" , Photo 2L Size , Photo L Size .<br />

● Custom<br />

Specifies the size in the range of the document glass, 15 – 432 mm for X (horizontal direction) and<br />

15 – 297 mm for Y (vertical direction) in units of 1 mm. When setting custom size, use the ruler<br />

markings surrounding the document glass as a guide.<br />

● Among the buttons of Scan Size, the default values of all sizes except Auto Size Detect can be<br />

changed in the System Administration Mode. For details on the way to change, see “5.8 Scan Mode<br />

Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier). The default values are set as A3 ,<br />

A4 , A4 , A5 , B4 , B5 , 11×17" , 8.5×11" , 8.5×11" , Photo 2L Size , Photo L<br />

Size .<br />

● If the size cannot be automatically detected, an error message will prompt you to enter the document<br />

size.<br />

1 Load the document to be scanned.<br />

“2.2 Loading Documents” (P. 147) for details on loading documents.<br />

Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

171


Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

172<br />

3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

2 Display the Basic Scanning screen.<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Scan Options<br />

3 Select the mailbox for saving the scanned data.<br />

“3.1 How to Scan” (P. 154) for details on selecting the mailbox.<br />

4 Select Scan Size on the Scan Options screen.<br />

The Scan Size screen is displayed.<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

5 Set the scan size.<br />

■When specifying Standard Sizes:<br />

1 Select from the scan sizes displayed.<br />

Menu<br />

Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />

Auto 200dpi<br />

1 Sided<br />

Mailbox... Full Color<br />

300dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to H)<br />

Grayscale<br />

400dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to T)<br />

Job Template... Black<br />

600dpi<br />

More...<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Scan Size<br />

Scan Options<br />

2 Sided Originals<br />

1 Sided<br />

Reduce/Enlarge<br />

100%<br />

Auto Size<br />

Detect<br />

A3<br />

A4<br />

A4<br />

A5<br />

B4<br />

B5<br />

11x17"<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

Scan Size<br />

Auto Size Detect<br />

Bound Originals<br />

Off<br />

8.5x11"<br />

8.5x11"<br />

Photo 2L 5x7"<br />

Photo L 3.5x5"<br />

Cancel<br />

Menu<br />

Mixed Size Originals<br />

Off<br />

Border Erase<br />

: 2mm : 2mm<br />

: 0mm<br />

Save<br />

(15 - 297)<br />

Y<br />

Auto<br />

mm<br />

X<br />

(15 - 432)<br />

Auto mm


■When specifying Custom:<br />

2 Using , set the values of X and Y.<br />

Scan Size<br />

Auto Size<br />

Detect<br />

A3<br />

A4<br />

A4<br />

A5<br />

B4<br />

B5<br />

11x17"<br />

8.5x11"<br />

8.5x11"<br />

Photo 2L 5x7"<br />

Photo L 3.5x5"<br />

Cancel<br />

3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

6 After checking the setting, select Save.<br />

The Scan Options screen is displayed.<br />

7 If necessary, configure other scan settings.<br />

8 Press Start.<br />

Scanning of the document will begin and the scanned data will be saved in the specified mailbox.<br />

Save<br />

(15 - 297)<br />

Y<br />

Auto<br />

mm<br />

X<br />

(15 - 432)<br />

Auto mm<br />

Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

173


Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

174<br />

3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

3.3.7 Reduce/Enlarge<br />

Procedure<br />

You can configure the scan % for scanning.<br />

Options for setting the scan % are as follows:<br />

● Preset %<br />

Choose from eight preset %: 100%, 50%, 70%, 81%, 86%, 115%, 122%, 141%.<br />

● Variable %<br />

Enter your own % for scanning. Enter between 25 to 400%, and in 1% units.<br />

● Auto %<br />

The % for scanning is automatically set based on the document size and the size set for Output Size.<br />

● Among the % for Preset %, the default values of all % except 100% can be changed in the System<br />

Administration Mode. For details on the way to change, see “5.8 Scan Mode Settings” in “Part 1<br />

Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier). The default values are set as 50%, 70%, 81%, 86%, 115%,<br />

122%, 141%.<br />

● The default values of Output Size when Auto % has been selected for scanning can be changed in<br />

the System Administration Mode. For details on the way to change, see “5.8 Scan Mode Settings”<br />

in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier). The default values are set as A3 , A4 , A4 ,<br />

A5 , B4 , B5 , 11×17" , 8.5×11" .<br />

● Areas that turn blank after scanning with Auto % will become white.<br />

1 Load the document to be scanned.<br />

“2.2 Loading Documents” (P. 147) for details on loading documents.<br />

2 Display the Basic Scanning screen.<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Scan Options<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

3 Select the mailbox for saving the scanned data.<br />

“3.1 How to Scan” (P. 154) for details on selecting the mailbox.<br />

Menu<br />

Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />

Auto 200dpi<br />

1 Sided<br />

Mailbox... Full Color<br />

300dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to H)<br />

Grayscale<br />

400dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to T)<br />

Job Template... Black<br />

600dpi<br />

More...


4 Select Reduce/Enlarge on the Scan Options screen.<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Scan Options<br />

2 Sided Originals<br />

1 Sided<br />

Reduce/Enlarge<br />

100%<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

The Reduce/Enlarge screen is displayed.<br />

Scan Size<br />

Auto Size Detect<br />

Bound Originals<br />

Off<br />

5 Set the scan %.<br />

■When selecting Preset %:<br />

1 Select Preset % and then the % for scanning.<br />

■When selecting Variable %:<br />

1<br />

Reduce/Enlarge<br />

Cancel<br />

Preset %<br />

(25 - 400)<br />

100 %<br />

100% 70%<br />

A3 A4<br />

B4 B5<br />

Variable %<br />

81%<br />

B4 A4<br />

B5 A5<br />

Auto %<br />

50%<br />

A3 A5<br />

86%<br />

A3 B4<br />

A4 B5<br />

3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

Menu<br />

Mixed Size Originals<br />

Off<br />

Border Erase<br />

: 2mm : 2mm<br />

: 0mm<br />

Select Variable % and then specify the % for scanning by using either<br />

or the numeric keypad on the screen.<br />

Reduce/Enlarge<br />

Preset %<br />

Variable %<br />

Auto %<br />

(25 - 400)<br />

100<br />

%<br />

1<br />

4<br />

7<br />

Cancel<br />

2<br />

5<br />

8<br />

115%<br />

122%<br />

141%<br />

3<br />

6<br />

9<br />

0 C<br />

Save<br />

B4 A3<br />

B5 A4<br />

A4 B4<br />

A5 B5<br />

A4 A3<br />

B5 B4<br />

Save<br />

Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

175


Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

176<br />

3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

■When selecting Auto %:<br />

1 Select Auto % and then the % for scanning from Output Size.<br />

Reduce/Enlarge<br />

Preset %<br />

Variable %<br />

Auto %<br />

Output Size<br />

6 After checking the setting, select Save.<br />

The Scan Options screen is displayed.<br />

A3<br />

A4<br />

A4<br />

7 If necessary, configure other scan settings.<br />

8 Press Start.<br />

Scanning of the document will begin and the scanned data will be saved in the specified mailbox.<br />

A5<br />

B4<br />

B5<br />

Cancel<br />

11x17"<br />

Save<br />

8.5x11"


3.3.8 Bound Originals<br />

Procedure<br />

3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

You can scan facing pages of a bound document on separate sheets of paper in<br />

page order. Useful for separating the left and right pages of bound documents for<br />

scanning.<br />

● Left Page then Right<br />

Scans from the left page of documents whose page numbers start from the left.<br />

● Right Page then Left<br />

Scans from the right page of documents whose page numbers start from the right.<br />

● Top Page then Bottom<br />

Scans from the top page of documents whose page numbers start from the top.<br />

● To scan Bound Originals, place the document on the document glass.<br />

● Bound documents of non-standard size will not be correctly separated into two parts for scanning.<br />

1 Select Bound Originals on the Scan Options screen.<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Scan Options<br />

2 Sided Originals<br />

1 Sided<br />

Reduce/Enlarge<br />

100%<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

The Bound Originals screen is displayed.<br />

Scan Size<br />

Auto Size Detect<br />

Bound Originals<br />

Off<br />

Menu<br />

Mixed Size Originals<br />

Off<br />

Border Erase<br />

: 2mm : 2mm<br />

: 0mm<br />

Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

177


Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

178<br />

3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

2 Select the correct document type.<br />

Bound Originals<br />

Off<br />

Left Page<br />

then Right<br />

Right Page<br />

then Left<br />

Top Page<br />

then Bottom<br />

Cancel<br />

3 Select the page order to scan.<br />

Here, we will scan documents of the “Left Page then Right” type as an example.<br />

Bound Originals<br />

Off<br />

Left Page<br />

then Right<br />

Right Page<br />

then Left<br />

Top Page<br />

then Bottom<br />

Both Pages<br />

Left Page<br />

Only<br />

Right Page<br />

Only<br />

Center Erase<br />

(0 - 50)<br />

0 mm<br />

Cancel<br />

Selecting Left Page Only or Right Page Only will scan only the left or right pages of the document in<br />

page order.<br />

4 When Center Erase is selected, set the width to be erased using .<br />

Bound Originals<br />

Off<br />

Left Page<br />

then Right<br />

Right Page<br />

then Left<br />

Top Page<br />

then Bottom<br />

Both Pages<br />

Left Page<br />

Only<br />

Right Page<br />

Only<br />

Center Erase<br />

(0 - 50)<br />

0 mm<br />

Cancel<br />

Save<br />

Save<br />

Load your originals<br />

as shown below.<br />

Save<br />

Load your originals<br />

as shown below.


3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

5 Check the document type and then place the facing pages of the document<br />

on the document glass.<br />

Bound Originals cannot be used in the DADF.<br />

6 After checking the setting, select Save.<br />

The Scan Options screen is displayed.<br />

7 Select other scan settings if necessary.<br />

To cancel setting, press the C button on the control panel.<br />

8 Press Start.<br />

Scanning of the document will begin and the scanned data will be saved in the specified mailbox.<br />

Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

179


Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

180<br />

3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

3.3.9 Border Erase<br />

When scanning bound documents or documents with the document cover open,<br />

black marks may appear around the edges or at the center binding area of the<br />

scanned result. For such cases, you can erase these marks.<br />

Options available for erasing these marks are as follows:<br />

● Top & Bottom Edges<br />

Select this to erase marks at the top and bottom edges of the document. Erases the marks at the top/<br />

bottom edges based on the orientation of the document loaded.<br />

The width of the edges to be erased can be set within 0 to 50 mm and in units of 1 mm. Default value<br />

is 2 mm.<br />

● Left & Right Edges<br />

Select this to erase marks at the left and right edges of the document. Erases the marks at the left/<br />

right edges based on the orientation of the document loaded.<br />

The width of the edges to be erased can be set within 0 to 50 mm and in units of 1 mm. Default value<br />

is 2 mm.<br />

● Center Erase<br />

Select this to erase marks at the center of bound documents. The width of the edges to be erased can<br />

be set within 0 to 50 mm and in units of 1 mm. Default value is 0 mm.<br />

● As the Top & Bottom Edges and Left & Right Edges in the Normal setting have been set as 2 mm,<br />

you need to go to the Variable Erase setting to change these values to 0 mm if no border erase is<br />

required.<br />

● For 2-sided documents, you can set the same border erase value for both sides of the document.<br />

● When Reduce/Enlarge has been set, the border erase value will be decreased/increased proportionately<br />

to the scan %.<br />

● The settings for Top & Bottom Edges and Left & Right Edges can be changed in the System Administration<br />

Mode. For details on the way to change, see “5.8 Scan Mode Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware”<br />

of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier).


1 Load the document to be scanned.<br />

“2.2 Loading Documents” (P. 147) for details on loading documents.<br />

2 Select Border Erase on the Scan Options screen.<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Scan Options<br />

The Border Erase screen is displayed.<br />

3 Select Variable Erase.<br />

Border Erase<br />

2 Sided Originals<br />

1 Sided<br />

Reduce/Enlarge<br />

100%<br />

Normal<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

Scan Size<br />

Auto Size Detect<br />

Bound Originals<br />

Off<br />

3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

4 Using , specify a value for each of Top & Bottom Edges, Left &<br />

Right Edges and Center Erase.<br />

Border Erase<br />

Variable Erase<br />

Normal<br />

Variable Erase<br />

2 mm 2 mm 0 mm<br />

(0 - 50) (0 - 50) (0 - 50)<br />

2 mm 2 mm 0 mm<br />

Cancel<br />

Cancel<br />

Menu<br />

Mixed Size Originals<br />

Off<br />

Border Erase<br />

: 2mm : 2mm<br />

: 0mm<br />

The width of the edges to be erased can be set within 0 to 50 mm and in units of 1 mm.<br />

Save<br />

Original Orientation<br />

Head to Top<br />

Head to Left<br />

Save<br />

Original Orientation<br />

Head to Top<br />

Head to Left<br />

Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

181


Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

182<br />

3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

5 Check Original Orientation.<br />

Edge Erase<br />

Normal<br />

Variable<br />

Erase<br />

(0 - 50) (0 - 50) (0 - 50)<br />

5 mm 5 mm 0 mm<br />

If the document is loaded in a different orientation from the setting in Original Orientation, the scan<br />

result will not be the target result.<br />

For details on Original Orientation, see “3.3.4 Original Orientation” (P. 166).<br />

6 Select Save.<br />

The display will return to the Scan Options screen.<br />

7 Select other scan settings if necessary.<br />

To cancel setting, press the C button on the control panel.<br />

Cancel<br />

8 Press Start.<br />

Scanning of the document will begin and the scanned data will be saved in the specified mailbox.<br />

Save<br />

Original Orientation<br />

Head to Top<br />

Head to Left


3.3.10 Original Type<br />

Procedure<br />

3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

When Black has been selected for Output Color, you can select the Original<br />

Type for black and white documents.<br />

● Text & Photo<br />

Select this when scanning documents with both text and photo. You can automatically detect text<br />

and photo, and then set the respective image mode for text and photo.<br />

● Text<br />

Select this when you want to scan text clearly. You can also scan photo, graph and drawing clearly.<br />

● Photo<br />

Select this when scanning photo.<br />

You can change the default value of Original Type in the System Administration Mode. For details on<br />

the way to change, see “5.8 Scan Mode Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier).<br />

The default is set as Text.<br />

1 Load the document to be scanned.<br />

“2.2 Loading Documents” (P. 147) for details on loading documents.<br />

2 Display the Basic Scanning screen.<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Scan Options<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

3 Select the mailbox for saving the scanned data.<br />

“3.1 How to Scan” (P. 154) for details on selecting the mailbox.<br />

Menu<br />

Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />

Auto 200dpi<br />

1 Sided<br />

Mailbox... Full Color<br />

300dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to H)<br />

Grayscale<br />

400dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to T)<br />

Job Template... Black<br />

600dpi<br />

More...<br />

Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

183


Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

184<br />

3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

4 Select Original Type on the Image Quality/File Format screen.<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Scan Options<br />

The Original Type screen is displayed.<br />

5 Select the Original Type option.<br />

Original Type<br />

Original Type<br />

Text<br />

Image Compression<br />

Normal<br />

Text & Photo<br />

Text<br />

Photo<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

Lighter/Darker/<br />

Contrast<br />

L/D: Normal<br />

File Format<br />

TIFF<br />

This feature only works when the<br />

image is scanned using the Black<br />

option in Output Color.<br />

Cancel<br />

6 After checking the setting, select Save.<br />

The display will return to the Image Quality/File Format screen.<br />

7 If necessary, configure other scan settings.<br />

8 Press Start.<br />

Scanning of the document will begin and the scanned data will be saved in the specified mailbox.<br />

Menu<br />

Auto Exposure<br />

Off<br />

Save


3.3.11 Lighter/Darker/Contrast<br />

Procedure<br />

3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

You can configure the density to scan documents. Even when Output Color has<br />

been set to Full Color or Grayscale, you can still set the contrast.<br />

● Lighter/Darker<br />

Select from seven levels of density from Lighter to Darker. The closer to Darker, the darker is the<br />

density of scan, and the closer to Lighter, the lighter is the scan.<br />

● Contrast<br />

Select from five levels of density from Higher to Lower. The closer to Higher, the greater the difference<br />

between the bright and dark areas with the bright areas becoming brighter, and dark areas<br />

darker. The closer to Lower, the smaller the difference between the bright and dark areas.<br />

● You can change the default value of Lighter/Darker in the System Administration Mode. For details<br />

on the way to change, see “5.8 Scan Mode Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong><br />

(Copier). The default value is set as Normal.<br />

● You can change the default value of Contrast in the System Administration Mode. For details on the<br />

way to change, see “5.8 Scan Mode Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier).<br />

The default value is set as Normal.<br />

1 Load the document to be scanned.<br />

“2.2 Loading Documents” (P. 147) for details on loading documents.<br />

2 Display the Basic Scanning screen.<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Scan Options<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

3 Select the mailbox for saving the scanned data.<br />

“3.1 How to Scan” (P. 154) for details on selecting the mailbox.<br />

Menu<br />

Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />

Auto 200dpi<br />

1 Sided<br />

Mailbox... Full Color<br />

300dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to H)<br />

Grayscale<br />

400dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to T)<br />

Job Template... Black<br />

600dpi<br />

More...<br />

Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

185


Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

186<br />

3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

4 Select Lighter/Darker/Contrast on the Image Quality/File Format<br />

screen.<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Original Type<br />

Text<br />

Scan Options<br />

Image Compression<br />

Normal<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

Lighter/Darker/<br />

Contrast<br />

L/D: Normal<br />

The Lighter/Darker/Contrast screen is displayed.<br />

5 Configure the Lighter/Darker and Contrast settings.<br />

When Black has been selected for Output Color, the Contrast setting will not be displayed.<br />

■When setting Lighter/Darker:<br />

1 Use in Lighter/Darker to specify the density.<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

File Format<br />

TIFF<br />

■When selecting Contrast:<br />

<br />

1 Use in Contrast to specify the contrast.<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

<br />

6 After checking the setting, select Save.<br />

The display will return to the Image Quality/File Format screen.<br />

7 If necessary, configure other scan settings.<br />

Menu<br />

Auto Exposure<br />

Off


3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

8 Press Start.<br />

Scanning of the document will begin and the scanned data will be saved in the specified mailbox.<br />

3.3.12 Auto Exposure<br />

Procedure<br />

You can remove colors from the reverse side of the document when scanning<br />

the front side.<br />

You can change the default value of Auto Exposure in the System Administration Mode. For details on<br />

the way to change, see “5.8 Scan Mode Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier).<br />

The default value is set as Off.<br />

1 Load the document to be scanned.<br />

“2.2 Loading Documents” (P. 147) for details on loading documents.<br />

2 Display the Basic Scanning screen.<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Scan Options<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

3 Select the mailbox for saving the scanned data.<br />

“3.1 How to Scan” (P. 154) for details on selecting the mailbox.<br />

Menu<br />

Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />

Auto 200dpi<br />

1 Sided<br />

Mailbox... Full Color<br />

300dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to H)<br />

Grayscale<br />

400dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to T)<br />

Job Template... Black<br />

600dpi<br />

More...<br />

Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

187


Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

188<br />

3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

4 Select Auto Exposure on the Image Quality/File Format screen.<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

The Auto Exposure screen is displayed.<br />

5 Select On.<br />

Auto Exposure<br />

Original Type<br />

Text<br />

Scan Options<br />

Image Compression<br />

Normal<br />

Off<br />

On<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

Lighter/Darker/<br />

Contrast<br />

L/D: Normal<br />

File Format<br />

TIFF<br />

Cancel<br />

6 After checking the setting, select Save.<br />

The display will return to the Image Quality/File Format screen.<br />

7 If necessary, configure other scan settings.<br />

8 Press Start.<br />

Scanning of the document will begin and the scanned data will be saved in the specified mailbox.<br />

Menu<br />

Auto Exposure<br />

Off<br />

Save


3.3.13 Image Compression<br />

Procedure<br />

3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

When Full Color or Grayscale has been selected for Output Color, you can select<br />

how to compress full color documents.<br />

● High<br />

Saves the file at a high compression rate. The file size becomes smaller but with a loss in image<br />

quality.<br />

● Normal<br />

Saves the file at the normal compression rate. Produces the normal file size and image quality.<br />

● Low<br />

Saves the file at a low compression rate. The image quality is better but the file size becomes bigger.<br />

The default is set as Normal.<br />

1 Load the document to be scanned.<br />

“2.2 Loading Documents” (P. 147) for details on loading documents.<br />

2 Display the Basic Scanning screen.<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Scan Options<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

3 Select the mailbox for saving the scanned data.<br />

“3.1 How to Scan” (P. 154) for details on selecting the mailbox.<br />

Menu<br />

Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />

Auto 200dpi<br />

1 Sided<br />

Mailbox... Full Color<br />

300dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to H)<br />

Grayscale<br />

400dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to T)<br />

Job Template... Black<br />

600dpi<br />

More...<br />

Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

189


Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

190<br />

3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

4 Select Image Compression on the Image Quality/File Format screen.<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Original Type<br />

Text<br />

Scan Options<br />

Image Compression<br />

Normal<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

Lighter/Darker/<br />

Contrast<br />

L/D: Normal<br />

The Image Compression screen is displayed.<br />

5 Select the compression method.<br />

Image Compression<br />

High<br />

Normal<br />

Low<br />

File Format<br />

TIFF<br />

This feature does not work<br />

when the image is scanned<br />

using the Black option in<br />

Output Color.<br />

Cancel<br />

6 After checking the setting, select Save.<br />

The display will return to the Image Quality/File Format screen.<br />

7 If necessary, configure other scan settings.<br />

8 Press Start.<br />

Scanning of the document will begin and the scanned data will be saved in the specified mailbox.<br />

Menu<br />

Auto Exposure<br />

Off<br />

Save


3.3.14 File Format<br />

You can set the file format for saving scanned data.<br />

The options available are as follows:<br />

Selected settings on<br />

Output Color<br />

The color of the original<br />

document is in parenthesis.<br />

TIFF/<br />

JPEG<br />

Auto<br />

Select<br />

File Format<br />

JPEG TIFF<br />

Auto (color) JPEG × ×<br />

Auto (black and white) TIFF × ×<br />

Full Color JPEG<br />

Grayscale JPEG<br />

Black TIFF ×<br />

3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

DocuWor<br />

ks (XDW)<br />

When selecting Auto on the Output Color setting, and TIFF/JPEG Auto Select on the File Format setting<br />

while using the optional E-mail Scanning, JPEG is set to full color and grayscale documents and<br />

TIFF is set to black and white documents automatically per page.<br />

PDF<br />

: Can be set<br />

× : Cannot be set<br />

Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

191


Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

192<br />

3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

Procedure<br />

1 Load the document to be scanned.<br />

“2.2 Loading Documents” (P. 147) for details on loading documents.<br />

2 Display the Basic Scanning screen.<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Scan Options<br />

3 Select the mailbox for saving the scanned data.<br />

“3.1 How to Scan” (P. 154) for details on selecting the mailbox.<br />

4 Select File Format on the Image Quality/File Format screen.<br />

The File Format screen is displayed.<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

5 Select the compression method.<br />

Menu<br />

Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />

Auto 200dpi<br />

1 Sided<br />

Mailbox... Full Color<br />

300dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to H)<br />

Grayscale<br />

400dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to T)<br />

Job Template... Black<br />

600dpi<br />

More...<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Original Type<br />

Text<br />

Scan Options<br />

Image Compression<br />

Normal<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

Lighter/Darker/<br />

Contrast<br />

L/D: Normal<br />

File Format<br />

TIFF<br />

Menu<br />

Auto Exposure<br />

Off<br />

File Format Cancel Save<br />

TIFF/JPEG<br />

Auto Select<br />

TIFF<br />

JPEG<br />

DocuWorks<br />

PDF<br />

This feature is available for Job<br />

Template and it cannot be programmed<br />

on this screen. It does not work<br />

when Mailbox is selected.<br />

TIFF/JPEG Auto Select automatically<br />

selects JPEG for Full Color and<br />

Grayscale images and TIFF for<br />

black/white images.


3.3 Configuring Scan Settings<br />

6 After checking the setting, select Save.<br />

The display will return to the Image Quality/File Format screen.<br />

7 If necessary, configure other scan settings.<br />

8 Press Start.<br />

Scanning of the document will begin and the scanned data will be saved in the specified mailbox.<br />

Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

193


Scanning With Mailbox 194<br />

3<br />

3.4<br />

Importing Scanned Data to<br />

Computer<br />

There are two ways to import data stored in the mailbox of this machine to the computer:<br />

● import data saved in mailbox to an application program<br />

● import data saved in mailbox from mailbox viewer<br />

This section describes the two different procedures.<br />

3.4.1 Importing to Application Program<br />

Procedure<br />

The following procedure describes how to import data saved in the mailbox of<br />

this machine to an application program.<br />

To import mailbox data, you need to use the network scanner driver.<br />

The network scanner driver is software used to import document (scanned data)<br />

saved in this mailbox of this machine to an application program on the client via<br />

the network.<br />

Here, we use Wordpad of Windows 98 as an example.<br />

“1.6 Configuring Computer” (P. 138) for details on installing the network scanner driver.<br />

1 Start the application program for importing documents.<br />

The application program must support TWAIN. TWAIN is the standard for input equipment such as<br />

scanners.<br />

The Network Print Environment <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Network.pdf) in the PCL Driver/Network Utility<br />

(Windows ® ) CD-ROM for details on the verified application programs that are supported by this<br />

machine.


3.4 Importing Scanned Data to Computer<br />

2 From the File menu, select the command for selecting scan (source).<br />

The following screen is an example using the trial DocuWorks V4.0. The command name for selecting<br />

scan (source) differs according to the application program used.<br />

3 Select FX Network Scan from Sources and then click Select.<br />

4 From the File menu, select the command to import the image from the<br />

scanner.<br />

The following screen is an example using the trial DocuWorks V4.0. The command name to import<br />

image from the scanner differs according to the application program.<br />

The Network <strong>Scanner</strong> dialog box appears and scanners on the same network will be displayed.<br />

Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

195


Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

196<br />

3.4 Importing Scanned Data to Computer<br />

5 Select the scanner for connection from the list and then click Select<br />

<strong>Scanner</strong>.<br />

● When nothing is displayed, click the New Display button. There will be another search for the scanner.<br />

● Clicking the Change Display button will change the method of displaying the scanner name.<br />

● Only scanners within the same network will have their names automatically displayed. To display<br />

scanners on other networks, click the Change Display button to change settings.<br />

“3.6.1 Changing Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Driver Settings” (P. 208) for details on how to change scanner<br />

name and connect to other network.<br />

The dialog box to specify the mailbox will be displayed.<br />

6 Enter the mailbox password (001-200) for saving the documents for<br />

importing at Mailbox No. and the password at Password.<br />

● If the Save Password check box is checked, steps 5 to 7 can be omitted when you select the same<br />

mailbox the next time.<br />

● Clicking the Change <strong>Scanner</strong> button will return the screen to step 5 and you can re-select the scanner.<br />

7 Click Open Mailbox.<br />

A list of documents saved in the selected mailbox will be displayed.


3.4 Importing Scanned Data to Computer<br />

8 From the list, select the document for importing, and click Import.<br />

● You can select multiple documents.<br />

● You can also select Import, Update and Delete from the menu displayed by right-clicking on the<br />

list.<br />

Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

197


Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

198<br />

3.4 Importing Scanned Data to Computer<br />

Each item is explained below:<br />

<strong>Scanner</strong> Name Displays the name of the scanner which is connected.<br />

Mailbox No. Displays the number of the mailbox which is selected.<br />

File No. Displays the number which is automatically assigned by the<br />

machine.<br />

File Type Displays the type of document.<br />

Date/Time Displays the date and time of saving the document in the mailbox.<br />

No. (Pages) Displays the total number of sheets of documents. When Setting<br />

is clicked, if the Display mode under File List mode is set as<br />

Page in the Setting dialog box, Page is displayed and the number<br />

of pages will be displayed.<br />

Size Displays the size of documents.<br />

Type Displays the file format of documents. Select from JPG, MH, or<br />

MHR.<br />

Import button Imports the document.<br />

Delete button Deletes the document.<br />

Change <strong>Scanner</strong> button Changes the scanner to be connected. Returns to the screen of<br />

step 5.<br />

Update button Updates the document list in the selected mailbox.<br />

Setting button Displays the Setting dialog box and the way of displaying documents<br />

and importing documents can be changed.<br />

“3.6.1 Changing Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Driver Settings” (P. 208) for<br />

details on the method of changing.<br />

Cancel button Closes the color network driver.<br />

Help button Displays the on-line help of the color network scanner driver.


3.4 Importing Scanned Data to Computer<br />

When importing of documents begins, the following dialog box will be displayed and the scanned data<br />

will be transferred from the mailbox to the client.<br />

When the transfer is completed, the document is imported to the application program and the document<br />

in the mailbox deleted.<br />

● When scanning is done by pages, documents with pages not scanned will be displayed in the list<br />

preceded by “∗”.<br />

● Except for DocuWorks, the network scanner driver extends the compression data and transfers it to<br />

the application program in BMP format for almost all other application programs.<br />

3.4.2 Importing From Mailbox Viewer<br />

The following procedure describes how to import data saved in the mailbox of<br />

this machine to an application program.<br />

To import scanned data in the mailbox to the computer, you need to use the<br />

mailbox viewer.<br />

Wordpad for Windows 98 is used as an example here.<br />

“1.7 Installing the Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility” (P. 139) for details on how to install the mailbox viewer.<br />

Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

199


Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

200<br />

3.4 Importing Scanned Data to Computer<br />

Procedure<br />

1 Carry out steps 1 to 4 of “3.5.2 Checking/Deleting on Computer<br />

(Mailbox Viewer)” (P. 206) to activate the mailbox viewer.<br />

2 From the list, select the document for importing, then click Import.<br />

● You can select multiple documents.<br />

● You can also select Import, Update and Delete from the menu displayed by right-clicking on the<br />

list.<br />

When importing scanned documents from the mailbox viewer to the computer, the Import all existing<br />

documents must be checked for the Setting dialog box. When it is checked, the Update button of the<br />

mailbox viewer becomes Import.<br />

“3.6.2 Changing Mailbox Viewer Settings” (P. 212)<br />

Clicking the Import button will import all scanned data in the mailbox to save it to a specified directory<br />

(default: C:\temp).


3.4 Importing Scanned Data to Computer<br />

3.4.3 Importing Mailbox Data Using Centre-<br />

Ware Internet Services<br />

Procedure<br />

The following procedure describes how to import data saved in the mailbox of<br />

this machine using CentreWare Internet Services.<br />

For a brief description of CentreWare Internet Services, see “Part 1 <strong>Printer</strong>” “Chapter 5 Configuring<br />

From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)” (P. 105).<br />

1 Activate the host device, and then the browser.<br />

2 Enter the IP address or Internet address of this machine at the address<br />

column of the browser, and then press Enter on the keyboard.<br />

The CentreWare Internet Services screen will be displayed.<br />

Check with the system administrator on the IP address and Internet address to be entered.<br />

3 Select Mailbox on the Properties tab.<br />

The screen for specifying the mailbox will be displayed.<br />

4 Enter the mailbox number (1-200) for saving the documents to be<br />

imported, and the password at Password.<br />

Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

201


Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

202<br />

3.4 Importing Scanned Data to Computer<br />

5 Click Display Document List.<br />

A list of documents saved in the mailbox will be displayed.<br />

6 Mark the checkbox of the document number to import, and click<br />

Retrieve.<br />

A screen for confirming retrieval of the mailbox document will be displayed.<br />

For details on operation, see On-line Help displayed by clicking Help on the bottom frame.


3.5 Checking/Deleting<br />

Scanned Data in Mailbox<br />

There are two ways to check/delete documents saved in the mailbox of this machine:<br />

● using this machine, delete scanned documents<br />

● using the computer, check/delete scanned documents (using mailbox viewer)<br />

This section describes the two different procedures.<br />

Scanned documents cannot be printed.<br />

3.5.1 Checking/Deleting on This Machine<br />

Procedure<br />

The procedure below describes how to check/delete documents saved in the<br />

mailbox of this machine using the touch panel display.<br />

1 Display the Basic Scanning screen.<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Scan Options<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

2 Under Save to, select Mailbox.<br />

The Mailbox screen is displayed.<br />

You can also display the Mailbox screen by pressing the Job Status button on the control panel, and<br />

then selecting the Mailbox button on the Job Status screen.<br />

Menu<br />

Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />

Auto 200dpi<br />

1 Sided<br />

Mailbox... Full Color<br />

300dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to H)<br />

Grayscale<br />

400dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to T)<br />

Job Template... Black<br />

600dpi<br />

More...<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Scan Options<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

Menu<br />

Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />

Auto 200dpi<br />

1 Sided<br />

Mailbox... Full Color<br />

300dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to H)<br />

Grayscale<br />

400dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to T)<br />

Job Template... Black<br />

600dpi<br />

More...<br />

Scanning With Mailbox<br />

3<br />

203


Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

204<br />

3.5 Checking/Deleting Scanned Data in Mailbox<br />

3 Select the mailbox for selecting/deleting documents.<br />

Selecting the button will display the previous screen and the button the next screen. Or using<br />

the numeric keypad on the control panel, you can also enter the mailbox number at Go to to specify the<br />

mailbox directly.<br />

Mailbox Close<br />

001 002 003 004<br />

K Mailbox H Mailbox H Mailbox<br />

(Not in Use)<br />

005 006 007<br />

008<br />

(Not in Use) (Not in Use) (Not in Use) (Not in Use)<br />

009 010 011 012<br />

(Not in Use) (Not in Use)<br />

If there are documents in the mailbox, the number of documents saved in the mailbox will be displayed<br />

on the bottom right of the screen in No. of Docs: once the mailbox is selected.<br />

If the password has been set, the screen to enter the password will appear. Enter the password and<br />

then select the Confirm button. If you have forgotten the mailbox password, reset it in the System<br />

Administration Mode.<br />

4 Select Document List.<br />

(Not in Use) (Not in Use)<br />

The Mailbox xxx – Document List screen is displayed.<br />

Go to<br />

(001 - 200)<br />

Document List<br />

Mailbox Close<br />

001 002 003 004<br />

K Mailbox H Mailbox H Mailbox<br />

005 006 007<br />

(Not in Use)<br />

(Not in Use)<br />

009 010 011 012<br />

(Not in Use) (Not in Use)<br />

(Not in Use)<br />

(Not in Use)<br />

008<br />

(Not in Use)<br />

(Not in Use) (Not in Use)<br />

Go to<br />

(001 - 200)<br />

Document List<br />

No. of Docs: 10<br />

Mailbox Close<br />

001 002 003 004<br />

K Mailbox H Mailbox H Mailbox<br />

005 006 007<br />

(Not in Use)<br />

(Not in Use)<br />

009 010 011 012<br />

(Not in Use) (Not in Use)<br />

(Not in Use)<br />

(Not in Use)<br />

008<br />

(Not in Use)<br />

(Not in Use) (Not in Use)<br />

Go to<br />

(001 - 200)<br />

Document List<br />

No. of Docs: 10


3.5 Checking/Deleting Scanned Data in Mailbox<br />

5 Check the document or select the document for deleting.<br />

■Checking document:<br />

1 Check the document.<br />

Selecting the button will display the previous screen and the button the next screen.<br />

Mailbox 001- Document List<br />

No. Doc. No.-Type Stored Date Pages<br />

1 00002 - Store For Polling 2001/1/1 2:02 AM 1<br />

2 00004 - Scanned Docs. 2002/10/10 10:10 AM 100<br />

3 00006 - Mailbox Docs. 2002/12/31 11:59 AM 100<br />

4 03855 - Scanned Docs. 2000/7/7 4:45 PM 555<br />

5 65535 - Store For Polling 2000/7/30 8:31 PM 100<br />

■Deleting document:<br />

1 Select the document to be deleted, followed by Delete.<br />

Selecting the button will display the previous screen and the button the next screen. If the<br />

Select All button is selected, all the documents in the mailbox can be selected. You can select either<br />

just one or all documents.<br />

Mailbox 001- Document List<br />

No.<br />

Doc. No.-Type<br />

1 00002 - Store For Polling<br />

2 00004 - Scanned Docs.<br />

3 00006 - Mailbox Docs.<br />

4 03855 - Scanned Docs.<br />

5 65535 - Store For Polling<br />

Stored Date Pages<br />

2001/1/1 2:02 AM 1<br />

2002/10/10 10:10 AM 100<br />

2002/12/31 11:59 AM 100<br />

2000/7/7 4:45 PM 555<br />

2000/7/30 8:31 PM 100<br />

A screen for confirmation will be displayed.<br />

2 Check the contents on the screen, and then select Yes.<br />

Selecting the No button will return to the screen of step 1 .<br />

Mailbox 001-Show Document List<br />

No. The Document following document(s) No.-Type will Stored be deleted. Date No. of Pages<br />

Mailbox : 001 HID<br />

Doc. 1 00002 No.-Type - Store : For 00002-Store Polling 2001/1/1 For Polling2:02<br />

AM 1<br />

Stored<br />

2 00004<br />

Date<br />

- Scanned<br />

:<br />

Docs.<br />

2001/1/1<br />

2010/10/10<br />

2:02 AM<br />

Are you sure?<br />

10:10 AM 100<br />

3 00006 - Mailbox Docs. 2099/12/31 11:59 AM 100<br />

4 03855 - Scanned Docs. Yes2000/7/7 4:45 PM 555 No<br />

5 65535 - Store For Polling 2000/7/30 8:31 PM 100<br />

6 Select Close repeatedly until the Basic Scanning screen is displayed.<br />

Close<br />

No. of Docs : 10<br />

Select All<br />

Delete<br />

Close<br />

No.of Docs : 10<br />

Select All<br />

Delete<br />

Close<br />

No.of Docs: 10<br />

Select All<br />

Delete<br />

Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

205


Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

206<br />

3.5 Checking/Deleting Scanned Data in Mailbox<br />

3.5.2 Checking/Deleting on Computer (Mailbox<br />

Viewer)<br />

Procedure<br />

The procedure below describes how to check/delete documents saved in the<br />

mailbox of this machine by using the mailbox viewer.<br />

Wordpad for Windows 98 is used as an example here.<br />

1 Click the Start menu, followed by Programs, <strong>Fuji</strong> <strong>Xerox</strong>, Utility, and<br />

Mailbox Viewer 2.<br />

If other program folder name is specified during installation, it will replace Utility.<br />

2 From the list displayed, click the name of the scanner to be connected<br />

to, and then Select <strong>Scanner</strong>.<br />

Clicking the Change Display button will change the method of displaying the scanner name.<br />

<strong>Scanner</strong> names that will be automatically displayed include only DocumentCentre machines connected<br />

to the same network. To display DocumentCentre machines of other networks, click the Change<br />

Display button and then set the IP address and scanner name.<br />

“3.6.2 Changing Mailbox Viewer Settings” (P. 212) for details on how to change the scanner name<br />

and connect to other networks.


3.5 Checking/Deleting Scanned Data in Mailbox<br />

3 Enter the mailbox number (001-200) for saving the documents for<br />

importing at Mailbox No. and the password (within 20 characters) at<br />

Password.<br />

● If the Save Password check box is checked, the password will be saved if it is correct and this<br />

screen will be skipped the next time the Mailbox Viewer 2 is activated.<br />

● Clicking Change <strong>Scanner</strong> will return the screen to step 2 and you can re-select the scanner.<br />

4 Click Open Mailbox.<br />

A list of documents saved in the selected mailbox will be displayed.<br />

5 Check the document in the list.<br />

To delete document, select the document, followed by the Delete button.<br />

The On-line Help displayed by clicking the Help button for details on each option of the mailbox<br />

viewer.<br />

Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

207


Scanning With Mailbox 208<br />

3<br />

3.6<br />

Changing Network <strong>Scanner</strong><br />

Utility Settings<br />

Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility consists of the network scanner driver and the mailbox viewer.<br />

This section describes the procedure to change the Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility settings.<br />

3.6.1 Changing Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Driver Settings<br />

Configuring how to display scanner name<br />

When selecting the scanner, you can change the way to display the scanner<br />

name shown in the list.<br />

You can configure the setting on the dialog box displayed by clicking the Change<br />

Display button on the dialog box for selecting the scanner to be connected.


3.6 Changing Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility Settings<br />

Configure the necessary settings by referring to the explanation below:<br />

Use network Selecting this item will search the scanners in the following<br />

order. When the host name in respect of the IP address of<br />

the connected scanner has been set, it will be displayed as a<br />

scanner name.<br />

1 “Hosts” file (without extension) in Windows system directory<br />

● The Hosts file is in \Windows for Windows 95, Windows 98,<br />

Window Me, in \Winnt\System32\drivers\etc for Windows NT<br />

4.0, Windows 2000, and in \Windows\system32\drivers\etc for<br />

Windows XP. However, the directory name in which Windows is<br />

installed may differ according to the environment used.<br />

● To display the host name using the Hosts file, open the Hosts file<br />

with programs like Notepad, and separate the IP address and<br />

the host name by adding a line.<br />

2 DNS (Domain Name Server)<br />

The domain name is also displayed when registering with<br />

DNS. When the corresponding host name is not registered, it<br />

is displayed as “Machine Name (IP address)”.<br />

Use local file When this item is selected and the file is specified, the host<br />

name described by the file is displayed as the scanner name.<br />

Describe the file to be specified, in the same format as the<br />

Hosts file format.<br />

Example:<br />

xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx DocumentCentre C400 <strong>Scanner</strong><br />

Other network scanners When you connect to scanners in other networks, configure<br />

the setting as follows:<br />

In order to connect to scanners in other networks, communication<br />

by TCP/IP is needed.<br />

1 Check the Display other network scanners check box,<br />

and then click the Add button.<br />

2<br />

Enter the IP address of the scanner to be connected to<br />

and the corresponding scanner name in the following dialog<br />

box, and then click the OK button.<br />

Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

209


Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

210<br />

3.6 Changing Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility Settings<br />

Configuring how to import scanned data<br />

You can change the way of importing and displaying documents when importing<br />

documents from the mailbox.<br />

Configure the way to import documents from the dialog box displayed by clicking<br />

the Setting button on the dialog box for selecting the documents to be imported.<br />

Configure the necessary settings by referring to the explanation below:<br />

Import Order Specifies the order of importing documents.<br />

When New → Old is set, documents will be imported from<br />

the bottom document if Display Mode is set as By file and<br />

from the last page of the bottom document if set as By page.<br />

When Old → New is set, the order will be reversed.<br />

Display Mode Sets whether to display the scanned documents in the mailbox<br />

by file or by page. When the application program used<br />

does not support documents with multiple pages, select By<br />

page to import the pages one by one.<br />

Negative Image Reverses the white and black portions of black and white<br />

images. Use this feature when you want the document<br />

imported from the application program to be a negative<br />

image.<br />

Settings are invalid in the case of images read as full color images<br />

or grayscale images.<br />

Add Display Items Add the following items to the Document Settings screen.<br />

The added items may not be displayed depending on the<br />

machine model.<br />

File Name<br />

Location: The sender's Email address on the Email Document.


3.6 Changing Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility Settings<br />

Temporary Save as Specifies the temporary directory for saving documents in<br />

the process of being imported. If possible, specify a directory<br />

with a large capacity.<br />

In order to connect to scanners in other networks, communication<br />

by TCP/IP is needed. When the network scanner driver is used<br />

together with Able Model PR II or DocumentCentre Series scanner<br />

drivers, use their respective specific directories for Temporary<br />

save. If the same directory is used, the scanner drivers may not<br />

function correctly.<br />

Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

211


Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

212<br />

3.6 Changing Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility Settings<br />

3.6.2 Changing Mailbox Viewer Settings<br />

You can configure how to operate the mailbox viewer and the import features.<br />

To configure these settings, click the Setting button on the Mailbox Viewer dialog<br />

box.<br />

Configure the necessary settings by referring to the explanation below:<br />

Get information when<br />

opening Windows<br />

Retrieves the document information of the mailbox when the<br />

Mailbox Viewer dialog box is opened from the task bar.<br />

Update Time Specifies the interval to retrieve document information in the<br />

mailbox.<br />

The range of setting is 1 to 60 minutes.<br />

Import existing files when<br />

updating<br />

Imports all documents when retrieving document information<br />

in the mailbox.<br />

Checking this check box will change the Update button in the<br />

Mailbox Viewer dialog box to Import button. Also, the Import<br />

Settings button becomes enabled.<br />

Refer to the following page for details on the import settings.<br />

Notice mode Specifies how to notify that new documents have been created<br />

at the time of updating when the Mailbox Viewer is minimized<br />

in the taskbar.<br />

Animation: Notifies by change of icon.<br />

Sound: Notifies by sound.<br />

Can also specify WAV file.<br />

If your computer is not installed with a sound card, WAV files<br />

cannot be specified.<br />

Display File Type Sets the type of documents to be displayed in the Mailbox<br />

Viewer dialog box.<br />

Scanned Image: Documents imported by this machine.<br />

Received Fax: Faxed documents received from other fax<br />

machines.<br />

Stored for Polling: Documents saved for polling.<br />

Received Email: Documents received from outside by E-mail.<br />

Add Display Items Add the following items to the Document Settings screen.<br />

The added items may not be displayed depending on the<br />

machine model.<br />

File Name<br />

Location: The sender’s Email address on the Email Document.


Import Settings<br />

Configures how to import scanned data.<br />

3.6 Changing Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility Settings<br />

Configure the necessary settings by referring to the explanation below:<br />

Import Order Select the order of importing images.<br />

When Old to New is selected, documents will be imported<br />

from the bottom. Conversely, when New to Old is selected,<br />

the order will be reversed.<br />

Compress Format: B&W All the pages of the imported document will be saved as<br />

TIFF files. Select the compression type from MMR or MH.<br />

Compress Format: Gray/<br />

Color<br />

Compress Rate: Gray/<br />

Color<br />

Select whether or not to compress. The only format available<br />

is JPEG.<br />

This setting will not be available when compressing image<br />

imported from a network scanner.<br />

Good quality, large size: Data size increases but image quality<br />

improves.<br />

Standard: Standard compression rate.<br />

Poor quality, small size: Image quality deteriorates but data<br />

size decreases.<br />

Saving method Save multi-page as a file: Saves multi-page as TIFF.<br />

Save each page as a file: Saves each page as a file inside<br />

the folder. Black and white pages will be saved as single<br />

page TIFF format. Will be saved as JPEG format when Compress<br />

(JPEG) has been selected for Compress Format:<br />

Gray/Color and as BMP format when Do not compress has<br />

been selected.<br />

Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

213


Scanning With Mailbox 3<br />

214<br />

3.6 Changing Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Utility Settings<br />

Adding to Folder Name The file and folder names are as follows:<br />

File Name, location...: File name or location - IP address of<br />

scanner - File No. - Date/Time<br />

Entered string, IP address..: Specified string - IP address of<br />

scanner device - File No. -<br />

Date/Time<br />

Save in Specifies the location to save the imported documents.<br />

Select a drive with a large capacity.


4Scanning With Job<br />

Template<br />

4.1 How to Scan................................................................................... 216<br />

4.1.1 Flow of Scanning ............................................................ 216<br />

4.1.2 Saving in Server (Specifying Job Template) ................... 216<br />

4.2 Printing Job Template List.............................................................. 218


Scanning With Job Template<br />

4<br />

216<br />

4.1<br />

How to Scan<br />

This section describes how to scan using Job Template.<br />

4.1.1 Flow of Scanning<br />

The flow of scanning using Job Template is as follows:<br />

1 Loading documents<br />

● Step 1 of “4.1.2 Saving in Server (Specifying Job Template)” (P. 216)<br />

2<br />

Specifying Job Template and then scanning the document.<br />

● Steps 2 to 5 of “4.1.2 Saving in Server (Specifying Job Template)” (P. 216)<br />

CentreWare Scanning Services Installation <strong>Guide</strong> for details on CentreWare Scanning Services.<br />

4.1.2 Saving in Server (Specifying Job Template)<br />

Procedure<br />

Specify the file (Job Template) with settings like the import settings and transfer<br />

server information, and then scan the document.<br />

The scanned data will be changed to TIFF or JPEG format and then automatically<br />

transferred to the server. The Job Template will use the Job Template Utility<br />

of CentreWare Internet Services or CentreWare Scanning Services and will be<br />

created on the computer and then saved in the server. This machine will automatically<br />

retrieve the job template saved in the server.<br />

● CentreWare Scanning Services Installation <strong>Guide</strong> for details on CentreWare Scanning Services.<br />

● CentreWare Internet Services help for details on the CentreWare Internet Services. You can display<br />

help by selecting Job Templates in the CWIS screen and then clicking on help.<br />

1 Load the document to be scanned.<br />

“2.2 Loading Documents” (P. 147) for details on loading documents.


2 Display the Basic Scanning screen.<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Scan Options<br />

3 Select Job Template.<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

4.1 How to Scan<br />

If the Job Template button is not displayed on the screen, see “1.5 Configuring for Using Job Template”<br />

(P. 133) to check the settings.<br />

4 Select the job template with the needed import settings.<br />

If any created job template is still not displayed, select the Refresh button.<br />

Selecting the Template Description button can display description of the job template. However, if no<br />

explanation has been added when creating the job template, nothing will be displayed.<br />

5 Press Start.<br />

The document will be scanned and the scanned data stored in the hard disk and then automatically<br />

transferred to the server.<br />

Menu<br />

Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />

Auto 200dpi<br />

1 Sided<br />

Mailbox... Full Color<br />

300dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to H)<br />

Grayscale<br />

400dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to T)<br />

Job Template... Black<br />

600dpi<br />

More...<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Scan Options<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

Menu<br />

Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />

Auto 200dpi<br />

1 Sided<br />

Mailbox... Full Color<br />

300dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to H)<br />

Grayscale<br />

400dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to T)<br />

Job Template... Black<br />

600dpi<br />

More...<br />

Job Template<br />

001 K Test 002 Ha Test<br />

003 Hi Test<br />

004 E Test<br />

Refresh<br />

Close<br />

Go to<br />

(001 - 250)<br />

Template<br />

Description<br />

Scanning With Job Template<br />

4<br />

217


Scanning With Job Template<br />

4<br />

218<br />

4.2<br />

Printing Job Template List<br />

This section describes how to print out the Job Template List on this machine.<br />

The Job Template List contains settings of the server used for storing the job template and<br />

which is set by CentreWare Internet Services or CentreWare Scanning Services.<br />

Print out the Job Template List via the touch panel display.<br />

“6.6 Printing Reports/Lists” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on using the printer.


5E-mail Scanning<br />

5.1 Scanning Document to Send as E-mail ......................................... 220<br />

5.1.1 Requirements ................................................................. 220<br />

5.1.2 Scan and Mail................................................................. 220<br />

5.1.3 Registering Dial Directory............................................... 223


E-mail Scanning<br />

5<br />

220<br />

5.1<br />

Scanning Document to<br />

Send as E-mail<br />

You can scan document and send it as an e-mail at the same time using this machine. This<br />

feature is known as “E-mail Scanning”. You can also set the maximum size of the e-mail.<br />

● You need to install the optional E-mail Kit on this machine in order to use the E-mail Scanning feature.<br />

● Scanned documents cannot be printed.<br />

5.1.1 Requirements<br />

To send the document as an e-mail, you need to set up the following. Check with<br />

your system administrator or network administrator to check if the settings have<br />

been configured.<br />

Setting network environment and mail server<br />

● registering user account<br />

● setting mail server<br />

“4.7 E-mail Printing” (P. 91) of “Part 1 <strong>Printer</strong>” for details on setting the mail server.<br />

5.1.2 Scan and Mail<br />

Procedure<br />

The procedure to scan a document and e-mail it is as follows:<br />

1 Load the document to be scanned.<br />

“2.2 Loading Documents” (P. 147) for details on loading documents.<br />

2 Display the Basic Scanning screen.


3 Under Save to, select E-mail.<br />

Basic Scanning<br />

Scan Options<br />

The E-mail screen is displayed.<br />

Image Quality/<br />

File Format<br />

Scan to: Output Color Scan Resolution 2 Sided Originals<br />

E-mail<br />

Auto 200dpi<br />

1 Sided<br />

Full Color<br />

300dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to H)<br />

Mailbox... Grayscale<br />

400dpi<br />

2 Sided (H to T)<br />

Job Template...<br />

Black<br />

600dpi<br />

More...<br />

4 Specify the recipient of the scanned data.<br />

The options to specify are as follows:<br />

■When the contents is Same as Sender:<br />

5.1 Scanning Document to Send as E-mail<br />

Item Description<br />

Default<br />

value<br />

To Enter the e-mail address. You can also use the dial directory.<br />

Not Set<br />

Subject Enter the subject of the mail. Auto Set<br />

From Register the name of the sender. This sender’s name will<br />

appear on the Send Header and Cover Note.<br />

Machine Email<br />

Address<br />

Reply To Enter the e-mail address of the recipient. Same as<br />

Sender<br />

Errors-To Specify whether to send an Error Mail when the data cannot<br />

be sent due to a wrong address being set or an error<br />

that occurred.<br />

E-mail<br />

To: (Not Set)<br />

Subject: (Auto Set)<br />

From: (Not Set)<br />

Reply To: (Same as Sender)<br />

Errors-To: (Same as Sender)<br />

Cancel<br />

Same as<br />

Sender<br />

Selecting Same as Sender will set the contents similar to the sender.<br />

Menu<br />

Save<br />

Same as<br />

Sender<br />

Open<br />

Address Book<br />

Keyboard<br />

E-mail Scanning<br />

5<br />

221


E-mail Scanning<br />

5<br />

222<br />

5.1 Scanning Document to Send as E-mail<br />

■When using address list:<br />

Select Open Address Book.<br />

Selecting Enter Number and then using the numeric keypad to enter the speed dial number at Go to will<br />

display the specified number at the beginning of the dial directory list. You also specify the index on the<br />

screen displayed by clicking the ABCDE, FGHIJ, KLMNO, PQRST, UVWXYZ, 0 – 9 tabs.<br />

Selecting the button will display the previous screen and the button the next screen.<br />

Address:<br />

001 <strong>Fuji</strong> <strong>Xerox</strong> 002 Akira Endo 003<br />

004<br />

007<br />

005<br />

008<br />

Only the address for e-mail can be used.<br />

“5.1.3 Registering Dial Directory” (P. 223) for details on setting the dial directory.<br />

■When using the keyboard to enter:<br />

Select Keyboard.<br />

The display might differ according to the ROM versions.<br />

Using the keyboard, enter the characters.<br />

5 Select Save.<br />

The display will return to the Basic Scanning screen.<br />

6 If necessary, configure the scan settings.<br />

006<br />

009<br />

010 011 012<br />

Cancel<br />

Address List ABCDE FGHIJ KLMNO PQRST UVWXYZ 0-9<br />

Alphabet<br />

Symbol<br />

a<br />

h<br />

o<br />

v<br />

b<br />

i<br />

p<br />

w<br />

c<br />

j<br />

q<br />

x<br />

d<br />

k<br />

r<br />

y<br />

e<br />

l<br />

s<br />

z<br />

Cancel<br />

“3.3 Configuring Scan Settings” (P. 160) for details on configuring the scan settings.<br />

f<br />

m<br />

t<br />

7 Press Start.<br />

Scanning of the document will begin and the scanned data will be sent to the specified recipient.<br />

g<br />

n<br />

u<br />

@<br />

+<br />

/<br />

.<br />

-<br />

<<br />

_<br />

=<br />

><br />

Save<br />

Go to<br />

(001-500)<br />

Save<br />

Backspace<br />

Shift


5.1.3 Registering Dial Directory<br />

Registering directory<br />

Procedure<br />

5.1 Scanning Document to Send as E-mail<br />

1 On the control panel, press Password/System Settings.<br />

Either the System Settings screen or System Administrator – Password Entry screen will be displayed.<br />

● The System Administrator – Password Entry screen will be displayed if the system administrator<br />

password has been set. If the password has not been set, pressing the Password/System Settings<br />

button will display the System Settings screen.<br />

● If the System Administrator – Password Entry screen is displayed, see “5.2.1 Entering the System<br />

Administration Mode” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on entering<br />

the password. After the password has been entered, selecting the System Settings button will display<br />

the System Settings screen.<br />

2 Select Setup Menu.<br />

System Settings<br />

The Setup Menu screen is displayed.<br />

3 Select Address Book.<br />

Setup Menu<br />

System Settings<br />

Auditron<br />

Administration<br />

The Address Book screen is displayed.<br />

Setup Menu<br />

Mailbox Address Book<br />

Close<br />

System Administrator<br />

Password<br />

Close<br />

E-mail Scanning<br />

5<br />

223


E-mail Scanning<br />

5<br />

224<br />

5.1 Scanning Document to Send as E-mail<br />

4 Select the preferred address number, followed by Create/Delete.<br />

Selecting the button will display the previous screen and the button the next screen. You can<br />

also use the numeric keypad to enter a 3-digit dial number to Go to to specify the address number<br />

directly.<br />

Address Book<br />

Address No. Address<br />

001<br />

(Not in Use)<br />

002<br />

(Not in Use)<br />

003<br />

(Not in Use)<br />

004<br />

(Not in Use)<br />

005 (Not in Use)<br />

The Address Number NNN – Create/Delete screen is displayed.<br />

5 Select E-mail and then Detailed Settings.<br />

Adrress Number 001 - Create/Delete<br />

Address Type E-mail Address<br />

Fax<br />

1111<br />

Recipient Name<br />

iFAX<br />

1111<br />

Index<br />

E-mail<br />

1111<br />

6 Select the option for registering, followed by Change Settings.<br />

Selecting the button will display the previous screen and the button the next screen.<br />

Address Number 001 - Create/Delete (E-mail)<br />

Items Current Settings<br />

1. E-mail Address (Not Set)<br />

2. Recipient Name<br />

(Address Not Entered)<br />

3. Index<br />

(Address Not Entered)<br />

■1. E-mail Address<br />

Use the keyboard and numeric keypad displayed to enter the item.<br />

■2. Recipient Name<br />

Use the keyboard and numeric keypad displayed to enter the item.<br />

■3. Index<br />

Close<br />

Go to<br />

(001-500)<br />

Create/Delete<br />

Close<br />

Detailed<br />

Settings<br />

Close<br />

Reset All<br />

Settings<br />

Change<br />

Settings<br />

Use the keyboard and numeric keypad displayed to enter the item.


Changing/Deleting the registered contents<br />

Procedure<br />

5.1 Scanning Document to Send as E-mail<br />

1 On the control panel, press Password/System Settings.<br />

Either the System Settings screen or System Administrator – Password Entry screen will be displayed.<br />

● The System Administrator – Password Entry screen will be displayed if the system administrator<br />

password has been set. If the password has not been set, pressing the Password/System Settings button<br />

will display the System Settings screen.<br />

● If the System Administrator – Password Entry screen is displayed, see “5.2.1 Entering the System<br />

Administration Mode” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on entering the<br />

password. After the password has been entered, selecting the System Settings button will display the<br />

System Settings screen.<br />

2 Select Setup Menu.<br />

System Settings<br />

The Setup Menu screen is displayed.<br />

3 Select Address Book.<br />

Setup Menu<br />

System Settings<br />

Auditron<br />

Administration<br />

The Address Book screen is displayed.<br />

Setup Menu<br />

Mailbox Address Book<br />

Close<br />

System Administrator<br />

Password<br />

Close<br />

E-mail Scanning<br />

5<br />

225


E-mail Scanning<br />

5<br />

226<br />

5.1 Scanning Document to Send as E-mail<br />

4 Select the address number to change or delete, followed by Create/<br />

Delete.<br />

Selecting the button will display the previous screen and the button the next screen. You can<br />

also use the numeric keypad to enter a 3-digit dial number to Go to to specify the address number<br />

directly.<br />

Address Book<br />

Address No. Address<br />

001<br />

soumu@mail.net<br />

002<br />

(Not in Use)<br />

003<br />

(Not in Use)<br />

004<br />

(Not in Use)<br />

005 (Not in Use)<br />

The Address Number NNN – Create/Delete screen is displayed.<br />

5 Select E-mail and then Detailed Settings.<br />

Adrress Number 001 - Create/Delete<br />

Address Type E-mail Address<br />

soumu@mail.net<br />

Fax<br />

1111<br />

Recipient Name<br />

iFAX<br />

1111<br />

Index<br />

E-mail<br />

S1111<br />

6 ■When changing the registered contents:<br />

Select the item to change, followed by Change Settings.<br />

Selecting the button will display the previous screen and the button the next screen.<br />

Address Number 001 - Create/Delete (E-mail)<br />

Items Current Settings<br />

1. E-mail Address soumu@mail.net<br />

2. Recipient Name<br />

(Address Not Entered)<br />

3. Index<br />

S<br />

“Registering directory” (P. 223) for details on the procedure.<br />

Close<br />

Go to<br />

(001-500)<br />

Create/Delete<br />

Close<br />

Detailed<br />

Settings<br />

Close<br />

Reset All<br />

Settings<br />

Change<br />

Settings


5.1 Scanning Document to Send as E-mail<br />

■When deleting all items of the registered contents:<br />

1<br />

Select Reset All Settings.<br />

Address Number 001 - Create/Delete (E-mail)<br />

Items Current Settings<br />

1. E-mail Address soumu@mail.net<br />

2. Recipient Name<br />

(Address Not Entered)<br />

3. Index<br />

S<br />

A screen for confirmation will be displayed.<br />

2<br />

Check the contents on the screen, and then select Yes.<br />

Selecting the No button will return to the screen of step 1.<br />

Address Number 001 - Cleate/Delete (E-mail)<br />

Items<br />

All settings in Address Number 001 will be reset.<br />

1.Address (E-mail Add)<br />

2.Recipient Are you Name sure?<br />

3.Index<br />

Yes No<br />

All the contents of the selected speed dial number will be deleted.<br />

Reset All<br />

Settings<br />

Change<br />

Settings<br />

7 Select Close repeatedly until the System Settings screen is displayed.<br />

8 Select Close.<br />

The machine will reboot and the display will return to the previous screen prior to this procedure.<br />

Close<br />

Close<br />

Reset All<br />

Settings<br />

Change Settings<br />

E-mail Scanning<br />

5<br />

227


Part 3 Appendix


1Appendix<br />

A Main Specifications ........................................................................ 232<br />

A.1 Product Specifications .................................................... 232<br />

A.2 Printable Area................................................................. 233<br />

A.3 Internal Fonts.................................................................. 234<br />

A.4 Interface Board (for Token Ring)..................................... 235<br />

B <strong>Printer</strong>/<strong>Scanner</strong> Settings (System Administration Mode)............... 236<br />

C Precautions/Limitations.................................................................. 237<br />

C.1 SMB................................................................................ 237<br />

C.2 TCP/IP (LPD).................................................................. 239<br />

C.3 NetWare.......................................................................... 241<br />

C.4 Scan Features ................................................................ 244<br />

C.5 Print Auditron .................................................................. 245<br />

D Troubleshooting When Using SMB ................................................ 246<br />

D.1 Cannot Find <strong>Printer</strong> ........................................................ 246<br />

D.2 Cannot Print.................................................................... 247<br />

D.3 Cannot Delete Documents From <strong>Printer</strong> Window........... 247<br />

D.4 Cannot Auto Download <strong>Printer</strong> Driver............................. 248<br />

E Troubleshooting When Using TCP/IP............................................. 249<br />

E.1 For Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me.................. 249<br />

E.2 For Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP ....... 250<br />

F Troubleshooting When Using NetWare .......................................... 251<br />

F.1 When Not Printed ........................................................... 251<br />

F.2 When “Switch off the power” Appears ............................ 254<br />

F.3 When Target Print Result Is Not Obtained...................... 254<br />

F.4 No Notification ................................................................ 255<br />

G Troubleshooting for CentreWare Internet Services ........................ 256<br />

H Automatic Gradation Adjustment ................................................... 257<br />

I Glossary......................................................................................... 258<br />

J Q & A ............................................................................................. 260


Appendix<br />

232<br />

A Main<br />

Specifications<br />

This section describes the main specifications of the printing feature.<br />

A.1 Product Specifications<br />

Type Console<br />

Laser printer<br />

Printing system Semiconductor laser system<br />

Xerography<br />

Printing speed Conditions: A4<br />

(continuous printing of same contents)<br />

• For DocumentCentre C400 40 sheets/minute (black/white),<br />

22 sheets/minute (color)<br />

• For DocumentCentre C320 32 sheets/minute (black/white),<br />

16 sheets/minute (color)<br />

• For DocumentCentre C240 24 sheets/minute (black/white),<br />

13 sheets/minute (color)<br />

Warm-up time About 45 seconds<br />

(temperature at 20°C, 60% humidity)<br />

Resolution Color: 600 dpi, Black/White: 1,200 dpi<br />

(For text printing, equivalent to 2,400 dpi)<br />

We regret that improvements in specifications/appearance of the product may be made without prior<br />

notice.


A.2 Printable Area<br />

The print area when using PCL printer driver for printing is as follows:<br />

For non-standard sizes and sizes smaller than A3:<br />

A Main Specifications<br />

For non-standard sizes, the left and right unprintable areas becomes 4.5 mm when the width of the<br />

paper is 306 mm or more.<br />

For 12×18":<br />

Appendix<br />

233


Appendix<br />

234<br />

A Main Specifications<br />

A.3 Internal Fonts<br />

The following fonts can be used for normal operations.<br />

“6.6 Printing Reports/Lists” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on the<br />

optional PostScript fonts.<br />

Stroke fonts (for HP-GL/2 only)<br />

● European stroke fonts<br />

Outline fonts<br />

The relationship between the installed outline fonts and the Page Description<br />

Languages or emulation mode is as follows.<br />

In addition, the installed outline fonts cannot be used for PostScript (option) for<br />

normal operations.<br />

■Europian<br />

CG Times LetterGothic CourierPS<br />

CG Times It LetterGothic It CourierPS Ob<br />

CG Times Bd LetterGothic Bd CourierPS Bd<br />

CG Times BdIt Albertus Md CourierPS BdOb<br />

Univers Md Albertus XBd SymbolPS<br />

Univers MdIt Clarendon Cd Palatino Roman<br />

Univers Bd Coronet Palatino It<br />

Univers BdIt Marigold Palatino Bd<br />

Univers MdCd Arial Palatino BdIt<br />

Univers MdCdIt Arial It ITCBookman Lt<br />

Univers BdCd Arial Bd ITCBookman LtIt<br />

Univers BdCdIt Arial BdIt ITCBookmanDm<br />

AntiqueOlv Times New ITCBookmanDm It<br />

AntiqueOlv It Times New It HelveticaNr<br />

AntiqueOlv Bd Times New Bd HelveticaNr Ob<br />

CG Omega Times New BdIt HelveticaNr Bd<br />

CG Omega It Symbol HelveticaNrBdOb<br />

CG Omega Bd Windings N C Schbk Roman<br />

CG Omega BdIt Line <strong>Printer</strong> N C Schbk It<br />

GaramondAntiqua Times Roman N C Schbk Bd<br />

Garamond Krsv Times It N C Schbk BdIt


Garamond Hlb Times Bd ITC A G Go Bk<br />

GaramondKrsvHlb Times BdIt ITC A G Go BkOb<br />

Courier Helvetica ITC A G Go Dm<br />

Courier It Helvetica Ob ITC A G Go DmOb<br />

Courier Bd Helvetica Bd ZapfC MdIt<br />

Courier BdIt Helvetica BdOb ZapfCDingbats<br />

A.4 Interface Board (for Token Ring)<br />

This section describes the optional interface board (for Token Ring).<br />

Shape of the connector<br />

Pin arrangement<br />

STP connector specifications<br />

Pin No. Name Pin No. Name<br />

1 RX-A 6 RX-B<br />

2 N.C. 7 N.C.<br />

3 N.C. 8 N.C.<br />

4 N.C. 9 TX-A<br />

5 TX-B -<br />

UTP connector specifications<br />

Pin No. Name Pin No. Name<br />

1 N.C. 5 RX-A<br />

2 N.C. 6 TX-B<br />

3 TX-A 7 N.C.<br />

4 RX-B 8 N.C.<br />

A Main Specifications<br />

Appendix<br />

235


Appendix<br />

236<br />

B <strong>Printer</strong>/<strong>Scanner</strong><br />

Settings<br />

(System Administration<br />

Mode)<br />

The various printer/scanner settings can be changed in the System Administration Mode to<br />

make them easier to use.<br />

See “Chapter 5 System Administration Mode Settings” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong><br />

<strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on System Administration Mode and the options that can be set.


C Precautions/Limitations<br />

C.1 SMB<br />

The precautions/limitations of using SMB are as follows:<br />

Setting up of this machine<br />

● Be very careful in setting up IP addresses. IP addresses are addresses controlled<br />

as an entire system. Consult your network administrator before defining<br />

any address.<br />

● Depending on the network environment used, it may be necessary to set the<br />

subnet mask and gateway. Consult your network administrator before defining<br />

the needed item.<br />

● If setting the port to Enabled leads to insufficient memory, the port status may<br />

be set to Disabled automatically. In this case, either set the port to Disabled<br />

when it is not used or change the memory allocation capacity.<br />

● Specify the size for the receive buffer memory (SMB Spool) as required by the<br />

environment in use. If the size of the receive buffer memory (SMB Spool) is<br />

smaller than the transmitted data, the data may not be received.<br />

Setting up of host machine<br />

● Be very careful in setting up IP addresses. IP addresses are addresses controlled<br />

as an entire system. Consult your network administrator before defining<br />

any address.<br />

● Consult the Network Information Service (NIS) administrator when setting network<br />

(such as IP address) by a host being used under NIS.<br />

Switching off power<br />

Take note of the following points when switching off the power of this machine:<br />

■When SMB Spool is set to Memory<br />

All print data spooled to the printer memory, including data in the process of<br />

printing, will be deleted. When the power is switched on again, the print data will<br />

not be found.<br />

However, if the power is switched off immediately after the print data has been<br />

sent, the print data may be stored in the host device. In this case, when the<br />

power is switched on again, the stored print data will be printed first even if new<br />

print data has been sent.<br />

■When SMB Spool is set to Hard Disk<br />

All print data spooled to the hard disk of this machine, including data in the process<br />

of printing, will be saved. When the power is turned on again, the stored<br />

print data will be printed first even if new print data has been sent.<br />

Appendix<br />

237


Appendix<br />

238<br />

C Precautions/Limitations<br />

■When SMB Spool is set to Off (non-spool mode)<br />

All print data spooled to the receive buffer of this machine, including data in the<br />

process of printing, will be deleted. When the power is turned on again, the print<br />

data will not be found. However, if the power is turned off immediately after the<br />

print data has been sent, the print data may be stored in the host device. In this<br />

case, when the power is turned on again, the stored print data will be printed first<br />

even if new print data has been sent.<br />

During printing<br />

■When SMB Spool is set to Hard Disk or Memory<br />

If the print data is larger than the hard disk or the remaining memory capacity at<br />

the point of receiving print data, the data will not be received.<br />

When the print data has exceeded the receiving capacity, some host devices may re-send the data<br />

immediately. When this occurs, the host device appears as if it has crashed. To rectify the situation,<br />

stop the host device from sending print data.<br />

■When SMB Spool is set to Off (non-spool mode)<br />

If the machine has accepted a print request from a host device, it cannot accept<br />

any print request from other host device.<br />

■When the IP address or computer name of the host device is changed<br />

When the IP address or computer name of the host device is changed, it may not<br />

be able to process enquiry or delete request from this machine correctly. Ensure<br />

that this machine is free of print data in the receive buffer, and then turn the<br />

power off/on.<br />

You can use the printer control panel to stop/eject print data spooled to the receive buffer of this<br />

machine. For details on the way to do this, see “7.2.8 Forcibly Outputting Data Wait Documents” in<br />

“Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) or “3.6.2 Canceling Printing From <strong>Printer</strong>” (P. 58)<br />

of “Part 1 <strong>Printer</strong>”.<br />

■Deleting jobs<br />

For Windows NT 4.0 not installed with Service Pack 4 and later, you cannot<br />

delete jobs. If you delete jobs while the computer is receiving data, an error message<br />

will be displayed. In this case, the Retry button on the error message dialog<br />

box will not be effective.


C.2 TCP/IP (LPD)<br />

The precautions/limitations of using TCP/IP (LPD) are as follows:<br />

Setting up this machine<br />

C Precautions/Limitations<br />

● Be very careful in setting up IP addresses. IP addresses are addresses controlled<br />

as an entire system. Consult your network administrator before defining<br />

any address.<br />

● Depending on the network environment used, it may be necessary to set the subnet<br />

mask and gateway. Consult your network administrator before defining the<br />

needed item.<br />

● If setting the port to Enabled leads to insufficient memory, the port status may<br />

be set to Disabled automatically. In this case, either set the port to Disabled<br />

when it is not used or change the memory allocation capacity.<br />

● Specify the size for the receive buffer memory (LPD spool) as required by the<br />

environment in use. If the size of the receive buffer memory (LPD spool) is<br />

smaller than the transmitted data, the data may not be received.<br />

Setting up host machine<br />

● Be very careful in setting up IP addresses. IP addresses are addresses controlled<br />

as an entire system. Consult your network administrator before defining<br />

any address.<br />

● Consult the Network Information Service (NIS) administrator when setting network<br />

(such as IP address) by a host being used under NIS.<br />

Switching off power<br />

Take note of the following points when turning off the power of this machine:<br />

■When LPD Spool is set to Memory<br />

All print data spooled to the printer memory, including data in the process of<br />

printing, will be deleted. When the power is turned on again, the print data will<br />

not be found.<br />

However, if the power is turned off immediately after the print data has been<br />

sent, the print data may be stored in the host device. In this case, when the<br />

power is turned on again, the stored print data will be printed first even if new<br />

print data has been sent.<br />

■When LPD Spool is set to Hard Disk<br />

All print data spooled to the hard disk of this machine, including data in the process<br />

of printing, will be saved. When the power is turned on again, the stored<br />

print data will be printed first even if new print data has been sent.<br />

Appendix<br />

239


Appendix<br />

240<br />

C Precautions/Limitations<br />

■When LPD Spool is set to Off (non-spool mode)<br />

All print data spooled to the receive buffer of this machine, including data in the<br />

process of printing, will be deleted. When the power is turned on again, the print<br />

data will not be found.<br />

However, if the power is turned off immediately after the print data has been<br />

sent, the print data may be stored in the host device. In this case, when the<br />

power is turned on again, the stored print data will be printed first even if new<br />

print data has been sent.<br />

During printing<br />

■When LPD Spool is set to Hard Disk or Memory<br />

If the print data is larger than the hard disk or the remaining memory capacity at<br />

the point of receiving print data, the data will not be received.<br />

When the print data has exceeded the receiving capacity, some host devices may re-send the data<br />

immediately. When this occurs, the host device appears as if it has crashed. To rectify the situation,<br />

stop the host device from sending print data.<br />

■When LPD Spool is set to Off (non-spool mode)<br />

If the machine has accepted a print request from a host device, it cannot accept<br />

any print request from other host device.<br />

■When the IP address or computer name of the host device is changed<br />

When the IP address or computer name of the host device is changed, it may not<br />

be able to process enquiry or delete request from this machine correctly. Ensure<br />

that this machine is free of print data in the receive buffer, and then turn the<br />

power off/on.<br />

You can use the touch panel display to stop/eject print data spooled to the receive buffer of this<br />

machine. For details on the way to do this, see “7.2.8 Forcibly Outputting Data Wait Documents” in<br />

“Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) or “3.6.2 Canceling Printing From <strong>Printer</strong>” (P. 58) of<br />

“Part 1 <strong>Printer</strong>”.


C.3 NetWare<br />

The precautions/limitations of using NetWare are as follows:<br />

During setting up<br />

C Precautions/Limitations<br />

■Setting up of this machine<br />

If setting the port to Enabled leads to insufficient memory, the port status may be<br />

set to Disabled automatically. In this case, either set the port to Disabled when it<br />

is not used or change the memory allocation capacity.<br />

■Setting up environment for PCONSOLE<br />

Take note of the following points when setting up environment using PCON-<br />

SOLE:<br />

Item For PServer Mode<br />

No. of file server Up to 16 servers<br />

No. of print queue Up to 48 queues<br />

No. of notifying candidate Up to 48 users<br />

No. of password character Up to 32 characters<br />

If 33 or more characters are used for the password, printing cannot be carried out.<br />

■Using bindery reference queue (for directory service/PServer mode)<br />

This machine does not support bindery reference queue. As such, printing with<br />

bindery reference queue is not allowed.<br />

Appendix<br />

241


Appendix<br />

242<br />

C Precautions/Limitations<br />

During printing<br />

■When using CAPTURE/NPRINT<br />

There are optional features not supported by NetWare.<br />

: Supported (features of this machine)<br />

*<br />

: Features of the file server or workstation<br />

× : Not supported<br />

Option PServer<br />

CAPTURE NPRINT Mode<br />

SHow ⎯ *<br />

NOTify / NoNOTIfy NOTify / NoNOTIfy<br />

TImeout ⎯ *<br />

AUtoendcap /<br />

NoAutoendcap<br />

⎯ *<br />

Local = n ⎯ *<br />

⎯ PrintServer =<br />

Server = Server = *<br />

Queue = Queue = *<br />

Create = ⎯ *<br />

Job = Job = *<br />

Keep ⎯ *<br />

Form = n Form = n<br />

Copies = n Copies = n<br />

Remarks<br />

⎯ Delete *<br />

Tabs = n / NoTabs Tabs = n / NoTabs × Cannot guarantee correct<br />

printing<br />

Banner /NoBanner Banner /NoBanner ×<br />

FormFeed /<br />

NoFormFeed<br />

CONversion /<br />

NoCONversion<br />

FormFeed /<br />

NoFormFeed<br />

CONversion /<br />

NoCONversion<br />

JApanese / ENglish Japanese / ENglish ×<br />

■When printing with Windows application programs<br />

When the setting to print at High Speed is invalid, printing may not be done correctly.<br />

When you print from Windows application program, enable the High<br />

Speed setting.<br />

×<br />

×


Print control time<br />

C Precautions/Limitations<br />

■When using PSC/PCONSOLE<br />

Take note of the following points when carrying out print control using PSC/<br />

PCONSOLE with directory service or bindery service.<br />

There are optional features not supported by NetWare.<br />

: Supported (features of this machine)<br />

× : Not supported<br />

Parameter PServer<br />

PSC PCONSOLE Mode<br />

STATus ⎯<br />

Remarks<br />

PAUse <strong>Printer</strong> Pause In print server mode, the status<br />

of this machine becomes<br />

Stop.<br />

ABort Abort Job<br />

STOp [Keep] <strong>Printer</strong> Stop =<br />

STARt <strong>Printer</strong> Start<br />

--- <strong>Printer</strong> Rewind<br />

MArk Paper Tip Mark ×<br />

FormFeed Form Feed ×<br />

MOuntForm=n Load Paper<br />

PRIvate ⎯ ×<br />

SHared ⎯ ×<br />

CancelDown ⎯ ×<br />

Appendix<br />

243


Appendix<br />

244<br />

C Precautions/Limitations<br />

C.4 Scan Features<br />

The precautions/limitations of using the scan features are as follows:<br />

The “Network <strong>Scanner</strong> Driver Readme.txt” in the PCL Driver/Network Utility CD-ROM for details on<br />

the precautions/limitations on the network scanner driver and mailbox viewer.<br />

When retrieving documents from mailbox<br />

Display<br />

● When Delete/Save Documents is set to Save, the same document can be<br />

accessed by multiple clients.<br />

● When Delete/Save Documents is set to Delete, the number of multiple clients<br />

that can access the same document is only one. The document which is being<br />

saved or imported by a client cannot be seen from other clients.<br />

In both cases, you can add documents to the mailbox which is being accessed.<br />

When a document with many colors is scanned, the image cannot be displayed<br />

in the correct colors if the display mode does not support the display of the number<br />

of colors scanned. Use the display mode which supports the display of the<br />

number of colors scanned or more.<br />

Using network scanner driver and mailbox viewer simultaneously<br />

You cannot use the network scanner driver and mailbox viewer together from<br />

one computer to connect to this machine.<br />

When retrieving documents from multiple computers, you can retrieve documents<br />

from up to three of the same machine at the same time using the network<br />

scanner driver or mailbox viewer 2 by multiple computers.<br />

When printing documents saved in the mailbox<br />

When Mailbox is selected, only fax documents can be printed when printing<br />

saved documents using the touch panel display. Scanned documents cannot be<br />

printed.<br />

When polling from other fax machines<br />

When the machine is polled from other fax machines, scanned documents cannot<br />

be sent.<br />

When using TIFF files<br />

The TIFF files created by using Job Template or the mailbox viewer will be compressed<br />

to MMR or MH format. To open TIFF files, use an application program<br />

which supports these compression formats.


Restriction on scanning capacity<br />

C Precautions/Limitations<br />

The maximum scanning capacity of one page is 297 × 432 mm. For standard<br />

sizes, it is A3 or 11 × 17".<br />

Number of sheets of documents for scanning (using mailbox)<br />

Using mailbox, the number of sheets of documents which can be scanned at one<br />

time is 999 pages. The number of sheets for scanning may change according to<br />

the document size and resolution.<br />

C.5 Print Auditron<br />

The precautions/limitations for using Print Auditron are as follows.<br />

● When the PS driver is being used for shared printers, the Print Auditron does<br />

not function properly. Install the printer driver on each of the client PCs that will<br />

be using Print Auditron on the PS driver.<br />

● When using the PCL driver on a printer with a shared server, turn off the EMF.<br />

If it is turned on operations will not be correct due to transmission of faulty information.<br />

● When changing the setting for Specify Job Owner in the printer driver, enter the<br />

password again. Operations may not be correct due to unintended information<br />

being transmitted if the previously set password is used as is.<br />

Appendix<br />

245


Appendix<br />

246<br />

D Troubleshooting<br />

When<br />

Using SMB<br />

This section describes the possible causes, ways of verification, and the recommended<br />

actions for errors which may occur when using SMB.<br />

D.1 Cannot Find <strong>Printer</strong><br />

Cause Verification Action<br />

Transport protocol of the host<br />

device and this machine is different.<br />

There are multiple browsers.<br />

The network (subnet) is wrong.<br />

Name search of the host name<br />

is not working correctly (when<br />

transport protocol is TCP/IP).<br />

Host name specified on this<br />

machine already exists.<br />

On the host device, you can find<br />

the printer when it has been<br />

searched as “another computer”<br />

(Start > Find > Computer) but<br />

not when searched in the Network<br />

Neighborhood.<br />

When the PING command is<br />

issued, specifying the IP<br />

address of this machine gets a<br />

response but not when specifying<br />

the host name.<br />

Print out the System Settings<br />

List, and check if the status of<br />

SMB indicates “repetitive host<br />

name”.<br />

↑<br />

↑<br />

Specify similar protocol for SMB<br />

for host device and this machine.<br />

When there are multiple host<br />

devices within the same workgroup,<br />

change the Auto Master<br />

Mode in the SMB setting file,<br />

config.txt to Off.<br />

When this machine and the host<br />

device is in a different network,<br />

consult your system administrator.<br />

Check the settings of the SMB<br />

setting file, config.txt (WINS 1st<br />

server, WINS 2nd server, Subnet<br />

mask) with the settings on<br />

the host device (e.g. WINS,<br />

DNS, LMHOST).<br />

Change the Host name of the<br />

SMB setting file, config.txt to<br />

another name not in use.<br />

Also, either change the host<br />

name used by CentreWare Internet<br />

Services to another name<br />

not in use or reset this machine<br />

to default settings.


D.2 Cannot Print<br />

D Troubleshooting When Using SMB<br />

Cause Verification Action<br />

This machine is processing print<br />

request from other host devices<br />

(for non-spool mode only).<br />

Exceeded the maximum number<br />

of connections of this<br />

machine.<br />

The user name and password is<br />

not correctly set at the printer<br />

properties when using the<br />

Auditron feature.<br />

Check if this machine is processing<br />

printing. (An error message<br />

about insufficient storing space<br />

for waiting print jobs is displayed.)<br />

Check if this machine is processing<br />

requests (e.g. print requests,<br />

status enquiry) from multiple host<br />

devices simultaneously. (An error<br />

message about remote computer<br />

cannot be used is displayed.)<br />

On the Configuration tab of the<br />

the printer properties, check the<br />

setting of Specify Job Owner.<br />

After this machine has completed<br />

the processing, either send a<br />

print request or switch to spool<br />

mode on this machine.<br />

Wait for a while, and then send<br />

print request again. Or increase<br />

the value of Maximum Sessions<br />

on the SMB setting file, config.txt,<br />

and then reboot this machine.<br />

Specify the correct user name<br />

and password at Specify Job<br />

Owner.<br />

D.3 Cannot Delete Documents From <strong>Printer</strong><br />

Window<br />

Cause Verification Action<br />

Tried to delete all documents<br />

displayed in the <strong>Printer</strong> window<br />

(only possible for system administrator).<br />

Check if you are trying to delete<br />

print jobs from the <strong>Printer</strong> menu<br />

(Clear print jobs menu).<br />

Owner of print job is not correct. Check if the Owner of the select<br />

print job is similar to the name<br />

used for login to Windows.<br />

Service Pack 4.0 and later is not<br />

installed.<br />

(For Windows NT 4.0)<br />

Check the version of the Service<br />

Pack displayed when Windows<br />

NT 4.0 is activated.<br />

Select the print job you want to<br />

delete and then cancel it from<br />

the Document menu of the<br />

<strong>Printer</strong> window (Cancel Printing<br />

menu).<br />

Login to Windows again using<br />

the name of the Owner of the<br />

print job and then delete the print<br />

job.<br />

Install Service Pack 4.0 or later.<br />

Appendix<br />

247


Appendix<br />

248<br />

D Troubleshooting When Using SMB<br />

D.4 Cannot Auto Download <strong>Printer</strong> Driver<br />

Cause Verification Action<br />

Auto download feature is not<br />

working.<br />

Different printer drivers are<br />

saved.<br />

<strong>Printer</strong> driver is not saved within<br />

two levels from the Drivers<br />

folder.<br />

<strong>Printer</strong> driver is not saved in a<br />

folder which is named within<br />

eight alphanumeric characters.<br />

Check the Auto Driver Download<br />

setting of the SMB setting file,<br />

config.txt (only possible for system<br />

administrator).<br />

Check the printer type to see if<br />

the correct printer driver is<br />

saved.<br />

Check if the folder containing the<br />

printer driver is within two levels<br />

from the Drivers folder.<br />

Open the driver.txt of the Drivers<br />

folder, and then check if the<br />

message is “The folder name is<br />

not within eight alphanumeric<br />

characters”.<br />

Set the Auto Driver Download in<br />

the SMB setting file, config.txt to<br />

Enable and then reboot the<br />

machine.<br />

After saving the correct printer<br />

driver, reboot the machine.<br />

Save the printer driver in a folder<br />

within two levels from the Drivers<br />

folder, and then reboot the<br />

machine.<br />

Change the folder name to one<br />

using up to eight alphanumeric<br />

characters, and then reboot the<br />

machine.


E Troubleshooting<br />

When<br />

Using TCP/IP<br />

This section describes the possible causes, ways of verification, and the recommended<br />

actions for errors which may occur when using TCP/IP (LPD).<br />

E.1 For Windows 95, Windows 98,<br />

Windows Me<br />

Cause Status Display/Verification/Action<br />

The machine and host device<br />

are connected to different networks.<br />

An error has occurred in the network<br />

between the host device<br />

and this machine, and the connection<br />

cannot be established.<br />

This machine is switched off<br />

after the host device has sent a<br />

print request. Or the print<br />

request is sent to the machine<br />

when it is switched off.<br />

Print requests from multiple host<br />

devices are sent to this machine<br />

at the same time.<br />

Printing files cannot be spooled<br />

due to insufficient disk capacity<br />

of the host device.<br />

Status “Unable to print (Network Error)”<br />

Display<br />

Verification Check with the network system administrator to verify<br />

that the network connecting the host device and that<br />

connecting this machine are linked by a router or gateway.<br />

Action Connect this machine directly to the network connecting<br />

the host device.<br />

Status “Unable to print (Network Error)”<br />

Display<br />

Verification None<br />

Action Ask the network system administrator to check the<br />

network for errors.<br />

Status<br />

Display<br />

“Unable to print (Network Error)”<br />

Verification Check if this machine is switched on.<br />

Action Switch on this machine.<br />

Status<br />

Display<br />

“Unable to print (Network Error)”<br />

Verification None<br />

Action None (printing will be re-processed automatically).<br />

Status “Unable to print (Spool Error)”<br />

Display<br />

Verification Open My Computer and right-click the disk (e.g. Cdrive)<br />

installed with the system. Select Properties from<br />

the menu displayed and then check the free space<br />

available.<br />

Action After deleting unnecessary files to increase the free<br />

disk space, select Pause Printing from the Document<br />

menu of the <strong>Printer</strong> window to enable printing to<br />

restart.<br />

Appendix<br />

249


Appendix<br />

250<br />

E Troubleshooting When Using TCP/IP<br />

E.2 For Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000,<br />

Windows XP<br />

When printer is not printing<br />

Cause Verification Action<br />

Incorrect IP address is set. Ask the network system administrator<br />

to check if the IP address<br />

of this machine is correct.<br />

When LPD spool is set to Memory,<br />

the print data sent by the<br />

host device in one print request<br />

has exceeded the upper limit of<br />

the receiving capacity.<br />

An irrecoverable error has<br />

occurred during print processing.<br />

The transport protocol is different<br />

from that of the host device.<br />

Data format of the print data to<br />

be processed by this machine is<br />

different from that sent by the<br />

host device.<br />

Check the memory capacity of<br />

LPD spool, and then compare it<br />

with the print data which was<br />

sent in one print request.<br />

Check if there is any error displayed<br />

on the printer control<br />

panel.<br />

Check the selected transport<br />

protocol.<br />

When target print result is not obtained<br />

⎯<br />

Set the correct IP address for<br />

this machine.<br />

1. If the print data is a single file<br />

and exceeding the upper limit<br />

of the memory capacity, split<br />

the file into smaller ones not<br />

exceeding the said upper<br />

limit, and then send for printing.<br />

2. If the print data are multiple<br />

files and have exceeded the<br />

upper limit of the receiving<br />

capacity, reduce the number<br />

of files to be sent for printing<br />

at one time.<br />

Switch the machine off and on.<br />

Switch on the machine only<br />

when there is nothing on the display.<br />

Select the same transport protocol<br />

as that of the host device.<br />

Disable the output function of<br />

Ctrl-D.<br />

Cause Verification Action<br />

The specified print language is<br />

different from that of the print<br />

data.<br />

<strong>Printer</strong> driver of this machine is<br />

not used (printer driver of other<br />

companies used instead).<br />

Check the specified print language<br />

and that of the print data.<br />

Check that the printer driver of<br />

this machine is selected.<br />

Specify a similar print language<br />

for the print data.<br />

Select the printer driver of this<br />

machine. If it does not appear as<br />

an option, install and select it. If<br />

a printer driver from other company<br />

is used, the machine may<br />

not function properly.


F Troubleshooting<br />

When<br />

Using NetWare<br />

This section describes the possible causes, ways of verification, and the recommended<br />

actions for errors which may occur when using NetWare.<br />

F.1 When Not Printed<br />

Cause Verification Action<br />

The network component board<br />

(e.g. HUB) is not compatible with<br />

the automatic setting of the<br />

frame type.<br />

There is a breakdown in the network<br />

from the workstation to the<br />

printer.<br />

The user name or group name of<br />

the person sending the job is not<br />

registered in <strong>User</strong> of the print<br />

queue.<br />

Job sending to the print queue is<br />

prohibited.<br />

Check if the data link lamp of the<br />

network component board connected<br />

to this machine is on.<br />

Check if the frame type of the file<br />

server in the network is similar.<br />

Using NWADMIN from the workstation,<br />

check if the target printer<br />

object can be seen. *<br />

Using NWADMIN from the workstation<br />

and referring to the target<br />

queue object, check if the user<br />

name or group name of the person<br />

sending the job is registered<br />

in <strong>User</strong>. *<br />

Using PCONSOLE, check if Yes<br />

is set for <strong>User</strong> can register with<br />

the queue at the Current Queue<br />

Status of Print Queue.<br />

Using NWADMIN from workstation,<br />

check if the operator flag is<br />

checked at Recognition of the<br />

target print queue. *<br />

From this machine, set up the<br />

frame type specified to the file<br />

server which you want to connect<br />

to.<br />

Replace the network cable<br />

between the workstation and the<br />

printer that cannot be used for<br />

transmitting data.<br />

1. Re-send the print job to the<br />

print queue with the registered<br />

user name or group<br />

name of the person sending<br />

the job registered in <strong>User</strong> of<br />

Print Queue.<br />

2. Using NWADMIN from the<br />

workstation, register the user<br />

name or group name of the<br />

person sending the job at<br />

<strong>User</strong> of Print Queue*<br />

Using PCONSOLE, set to Yes.<br />

Using NWADMIN from workstation,<br />

check if each item of the<br />

operator flag is checked at Recognition<br />

of the target print<br />

queue. *<br />

Appendix<br />

251


Appendix<br />

252<br />

F Troubleshooting When Using NetWare<br />

Cause Verification Action<br />

The user name or group name of<br />

the person sending the job is not<br />

registered in print server user of<br />

the print queue.<br />

The print queue that sent the<br />

print job is not assigned to the<br />

printer.<br />

The settings of the data format<br />

of print job are not similar to that<br />

of the printing environment of the<br />

workstation.<br />

A print queue which exceeded<br />

the maximum number of supported<br />

queues of the printer has<br />

been set.<br />

The slave file server is not set<br />

(bindery service mode).<br />

Using NWADMIN from the workstation,<br />

check if the user name<br />

or group name of the person<br />

sending the job is registered in<br />

<strong>User</strong> of the target print server. *<br />

Using NWADMIN from the workstation,<br />

check if the target printer<br />

is assigned to the serviced<br />

printer in the list under <strong>User</strong> of<br />

the target print queue.*<br />

⎯<br />

Using NWADMIN from the workstation,<br />

check if the desired print<br />

queue is assigned to the print<br />

queue list under <strong>User</strong> of the target<br />

print. *<br />

Using PCONSOLE from the<br />

workstation, check if the slave<br />

file server is registered in Service<br />

NetWare Server under the<br />

print server corresponding to the<br />

Print Server Information. *<br />

<strong>Printer</strong> type is wrong. Using PCONSOLE from the<br />

workstation, check if the following<br />

settings are set under <strong>Printer</strong><br />

Information > <strong>Printer</strong> > <strong>Printer</strong><br />

xxx Environment: <strong>Printer</strong>= Parallel,<br />

Port= LPT1, Position= Auto<br />

mode (local).*<br />

The slave file server setting is<br />

wrong (bindery service mode).<br />

Using PCONSOLE from the<br />

workstation, check if printer type<br />

is set as Defined under <strong>Printer</strong><br />

Information > <strong>Printer</strong> > <strong>Printer</strong><br />

xxx Environment.*<br />

1. Re-send the print job to the<br />

print queue with the registered<br />

user name or group<br />

name of the person sending<br />

the job registered in <strong>User</strong> of<br />

Print Server Information.<br />

2. Using NWADMIN from the<br />

workstation, register the user<br />

name or group name of the<br />

person sending the job at<br />

<strong>User</strong> of the target print<br />

server. *<br />

1. Re-send the print job to a<br />

print queue assigned to the<br />

printer. *<br />

2. Using NWADMIN from the<br />

workstation, add the target<br />

queue as an addition to <strong>User</strong><br />

of the target printer. *<br />

For workstation using Windows,<br />

disable the output function of<br />

Ctrl-D.<br />

Re-send the print job to a print<br />

queue assigned to the printer. *<br />

After registering the slave file<br />

server using PCONSOLE from<br />

the workstation, reflect the setting<br />

parameters.<br />

Using PCONSOLE from the<br />

workstation, set <strong>Printer</strong>= Parallel,<br />

Port= LPT1, Position= Auto<br />

mode (local) and reflect the setting<br />

parameters. *<br />

If it is not Defined, change it to<br />

Defined and then reflect the setting<br />

parameters.*


The number of paper definition<br />

specified at the print server is<br />

not the same as that of paper<br />

definition set at the print queue.<br />

Using NWADMIN from the workstation,<br />

check if the paper definition<br />

specified at the print server<br />

is same as that of paper definition<br />

set at the print queue.*<br />

F Troubleshooting When Using NetWare<br />

Cause Verification Action<br />

The level setting for IPX checksum<br />

is wrong.<br />

The level setting for NCP packet<br />

signature is wrong.<br />

The default device name is<br />

wrong.<br />

The directory tree name is not<br />

set.<br />

At the console screen of the file<br />

server, execute a set command<br />

and check if the IPX checksum<br />

is set to level 2.<br />

At the console screen of the file<br />

server, execute a set command<br />

and check if the NCP packet signature<br />

is set to level 3.<br />

Print out the System Settings<br />

List, and check the lower six<br />

characters (3 bytes) of the Ethernet<br />

address.<br />

Print out the System Settings<br />

List and check if the tree name is<br />

specified.<br />

Context is not set. Print out the System Settings<br />

List and check if the context is<br />

specified.<br />

Connected to another printer<br />

object.<br />

NetWare port cannot be activated<br />

by setting.<br />

Using NWADMIN from the workstation,<br />

check if the object is correctly<br />

assigned by the layout<br />

information of the desired print<br />

server. *<br />

Print out the System Settings<br />

List and check if the NetWare<br />

port is activated.<br />

File server is down. Search for the target file server<br />

in Network Neighborhood.<br />

Using NWADMIN from the workstation,<br />

specify the same number<br />

of paper definition at the<br />

print server as that of paper definition<br />

set at the print queue. *<br />

At the console screen of the file<br />

server, enter the following command<br />

and set the IPX checksum<br />

to level 0 or 1:<br />

set Enable IPX Checksum = x (x:<br />

0 or 1)<br />

At the console screen of the file<br />

server, enter the following command<br />

and after setting the NCP<br />

packet signature to level 0, 1, or<br />

2, restart the file server:<br />

set NCP Packet Signature<br />

Option = x (x: 0, 1, or 2)<br />

1. Set the device name using<br />

the correct Ethernet address.<br />

2. Set the device name to any<br />

name except the default<br />

name.<br />

Set the tree name.<br />

Set the context.<br />

1. Using the PCL Driver/Network<br />

Utility CD-ROM from the<br />

workstation, set the file<br />

server name, tree name, context,<br />

active mode correctly.<br />

2. Using the CentreWare Internet<br />

Services from the workstation,<br />

set the file server<br />

name, tree name, context,<br />

active mode correctly.<br />

Activate the NetWare port.<br />

Activating the file server.<br />

Appendix<br />

253


Appendix<br />

254<br />

F Troubleshooting When Using NetWare<br />

Cause Verification Action<br />

There are printers with similar<br />

device name on the network.<br />

Switch off the machine and<br />

using NWADMIN from the workstation,<br />

check that the status of<br />

the corresponding printer object<br />

is job waiting.<br />

NetWare port is not activated. Print out the System Settings<br />

List and check if the network<br />

number when using IPX/SPX is<br />

at “00000000” (NetWare server<br />

down). Also, check if the IP<br />

address when using TCP/IP is at<br />

“0.0.0.0” (fixed IP not set or<br />

address supply server (DHCP)<br />

down).<br />

Using the CentreWare Driver &<br />

Network Utility CD-ROM from<br />

the workstation, set another host<br />

name.<br />

For IPX/SPX, activate NetWare<br />

server. For TCP/IP, set the fixed<br />

IP address or activate the<br />

address supply server (DHCP).<br />

*: Refer to “NetWare Online Documentation” for details on how to set and check.<br />

F.2 When “Switch off the power” Appears<br />

Cause Verification Action<br />

An error occurs in NetWare. ⎯ Switch the machine off and on.<br />

Switch on the machine only<br />

when there is nothing on the display.<br />

F.3 When Target Print Result Is Not Obtained<br />

Cause Verification Action<br />

The print language of the print<br />

job is different from that set up<br />

on this machine.<br />

Check the print language of this<br />

machine.<br />

Set the same print language for<br />

the print job and this machine.


F.4 No Notification<br />

F Troubleshooting When Using NetWare<br />

The possible causes, verification methods and recommended actions when<br />

there are no messages on the workstation which have been sent print instructions<br />

are as follows:<br />

No notification of printer errors<br />

Cause Verification Action<br />

Not registered in the Notify Candidate<br />

List of the print server.<br />

No notification of end of job<br />

Using PCONSOLE from the<br />

workstation, check if the user<br />

name and group name of the<br />

person sending the job is registered<br />

in Print Server Information<br />

> <strong>Printer</strong> > <strong>Printer</strong> xxx Environment<br />

Settings > Notify.<br />

Register the user name or group<br />

name of the person sending the<br />

job in Notify.<br />

Cause Verification Action<br />

When sending jobs from the<br />

workstation, the NOTIFY option<br />

is not specified.<br />

The NetWare CASTOFF utility is<br />

executed on the user workstation.<br />

Check if the NOTIFY option is<br />

specified when sending the print<br />

job.<br />

⎯<br />

Specify the NOTIFY option when<br />

sending the print job.<br />

Execute the NetWare CASTON<br />

utility on the user workstation.<br />

Appendix<br />

255


Appendix<br />

256<br />

G Troubleshooting<br />

for<br />

CentreWare Internet Services<br />

This section describes the causes and recommended actions for errors that occur while<br />

using CentreWare Internet Services.<br />

Cause Action<br />

Cannot connect to CentreWare<br />

Internet Services.<br />

The “Please wait” message is<br />

displayed throughout.<br />

The Refresh button is not working.<br />

Selecting menu in the left frame<br />

does not change the right frame<br />

contents.<br />

Is this machine working properly?<br />

Check if the power of this machine is switched on.<br />

Is CentreWare Internet Services activated?<br />

Print out the System Settings List to check.<br />

Is the Internet address correctly entered?<br />

Check the Internet address again. If cannot be connected, enter the<br />

IP address to make connection.<br />

Is the proxy server being used?<br />

Depending on the proxy server, connections might not be possible.<br />

Without using the proxy server, configure either the browser setting<br />

to “Not using proxy server” or the address to be used to “Not using<br />

proxy server”.<br />

Wait for a while as instructed.<br />

If nothing happens, try clicking the Refresh button.<br />

And even then, if nothing happens, check if this machine is working<br />

properly.<br />

Are you using the specified OS and browser?<br />

See “5.1.4 Target OS and Browsers” (P. 109) in “Part 1 <strong>Printer</strong>”, and<br />

check if the OS and browser in use can be used.<br />

The screen display is distorted. Change the window size of the browser.<br />

The latest information is not dis- Click the Refresh button.<br />

played.<br />

Characters are not correctly dis- Use Western European language command.<br />

played.<br />

Clicking the Apply New Settings<br />

button does not reflect the new<br />

settings.<br />

Clicking the Apply New Settings<br />

button will display in the<br />

browser, messages like “The<br />

server has returned ineffective<br />

or unrecognizable response.” or<br />

“No data”.<br />

Is the entered value correct?<br />

If the entered value is not a valid entry, it will change automatically to<br />

an entry within the limit.<br />

Is the password correct?<br />

The entry for Password is not similar to Confirm Password. Enter the<br />

correct password.<br />

Reboot this machine.<br />

Cannot delete job. Wait for a while and then click the Refresh button.


H Automatic<br />

Gradation<br />

Adjustment<br />

When the color gradation of the print image is out, it can be automatically adjusted. Through<br />

this gradation adjustment, the image quality of this machine can be consistently maintained.<br />

“3.4 Executing Automatic Gradation Adjustment” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on<br />

adjusting the gradation.<br />

Adjusting for printing<br />

When adjusting gradation for the printing of data such as text, select Print Job -<br />

Text.<br />

Auto Gradation Adjustment<br />

Copy Job - Text<br />

Copy Job - Photo<br />

Print Job - Text<br />

Print Job - Photo<br />

When adjusting gradation for the printing of data such as photos, select Print<br />

Job - Photo.<br />

Auto Gradation Adjustment<br />

Copy Job - Text<br />

Copy Job - Photo<br />

Print Job - Text<br />

Print Job - Photo<br />

Close<br />

Start<br />

Close<br />

Start<br />

Appendix<br />

257


Appendix<br />

258<br />

I<br />

A3<br />

420 × 297 mm paper.<br />

A4<br />

297 × 210 mm paper.<br />

A5<br />

210 × 148 mm paper.<br />

B4<br />

364 × 257 mm paper.<br />

B5<br />

257 × 182 mm paper.<br />

Glossary<br />

CMYK<br />

A way of expressing colors in process like<br />

color printing.<br />

It is divided into four colors of Cyan (C),<br />

Magenta (M), Yellow (Y), and Black (K),<br />

which are layered for printing.<br />

DPI<br />

Stands for Dot Per Inch, which is the number<br />

of dots that can be printed within a width<br />

of 1 inch. Used as the unit for resolution.<br />

ICM<br />

Stands for Image Color Matching, which is<br />

the color management software adopted by<br />

Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000,<br />

Windows XP. It corrects the differences in<br />

color due to devices so that the color of the<br />

print result is similar to that on the screen.<br />

Image Enhancement<br />

Feature which makes the border between<br />

black and white smooth, with rough edges<br />

reduced, giving the appearance of a higher<br />

resolution.<br />

NV Memory<br />

Non-volatile memory which allows the settings<br />

of the printer to be maintained even<br />

when power is off.<br />

RAM<br />

Stands for Random Access Memory, which<br />

is the memory device where information can<br />

be retrieved as well as reduced.<br />

ROM<br />

Stands for Read Only Memory, which is the<br />

memory device specific for the retrieval of<br />

information.<br />

Printable area<br />

The actual area on paper which can be<br />

printed.<br />

Emulation<br />

The ability of the printer to perform the features<br />

of other printers. The mode is called<br />

emulation mode.<br />

Resolution<br />

Expresses the fineness of the image. Usually,<br />

it is expressed by the number of dots<br />

per inch (dpi) so that the larger the value,<br />

the higher the resolution (details can be<br />

reproduced).<br />

Gradation<br />

Refers to the smoothness between colors.<br />

Expresses the number of gradations by the<br />

number of levels, so that the larger the<br />

value, the smoother the colors.<br />

Cut paper<br />

Paper of standard sizes like A4, B5.<br />

Common Menu<br />

The menu for common settings of the print<br />

mode, and consists of Meter Check, Setup,<br />

Report/List, System Settings, Network/Port<br />

Settings, Memory Settings, Initialization/<br />

Data Deletion, Print Settings, and Automatic<br />

Gradation Adjustment.<br />

Gradation<br />

The change in the continuous color density<br />

seen in photos and illustrations.


Receive buffer<br />

Buffer is the location to store data sent from<br />

the client temporarily. By increasing the<br />

memory capacity of the receive buffer, the<br />

client can be freed faster.<br />

Default value<br />

Factory default settings and settings upon<br />

NV memory initialization.<br />

Job<br />

A group of print data. The canceling and<br />

outputting of printing is done on a job basis.<br />

Screen<br />

For devices like printers, the density of<br />

printed matter is expressed in shaded dots,<br />

and the column of these dots or number of<br />

lines during printing are known as screen<br />

lines. Gradations which can be displayed<br />

change according to the number of screen<br />

lines.<br />

Protocol<br />

Rules of communication necessary for carrying<br />

out data transmission.<br />

Print page buffer<br />

Location where print data is actually processed<br />

and stored.<br />

I Glossary<br />

<strong>Printer</strong> driver<br />

The software which changes data created<br />

by the application program into data which<br />

can be interpreted by the printer.<br />

Mode Menu<br />

The menu for setting fixed conditions for<br />

processing each of the emulation modes of<br />

PCL emulation mode, HP-GL emulation<br />

mode, HP-GL/2 emulation mode.<br />

8K<br />

267 x 388 mm paper. Also called Hakkai.<br />

Appendix<br />

259


Appendix<br />

260<br />

J<br />

Q & A<br />

This section describes the frequently asked questions and their answers.<br />

Refer to them when using this machine.<br />

I wish to check the printer settings<br />

You can check the current printer settings by referring to the System Settings<br />

List.<br />

“6.6 Printing Reports/Lists” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on the<br />

<strong>Printer</strong> Settings List.<br />

I wish to know the available printing features<br />

For the PCL printer driver of this machine, the printing features include N Up, 2<br />

Sided, Poster, Booklet Creation.<br />

The On-line Help of the printer driver for details on each of these features.<br />

I wish to change the paper size of paper tray<br />

When you wish to temporarily use paper sizes other than those loaded in trays 1<br />

– 4, it is convenient to use tray 5 (Bypass Tray) for loading.<br />

You can change the paper sizes in trays 1 – 4.<br />

“3.2 About Paper” (P. 37) in “Part 1 <strong>Printer</strong>” for details on how to load paper in tray 5 (Bypass<br />

Tray) and change paper sizes of trays 1 – 4.<br />

I wish to print in black and white<br />

Black and white documents will be automatically detected and printed in black<br />

and white. To print color documents in black and white, select Black for Output<br />

Color on the printer properties dialog box.<br />

The On-line Help of the printer driver for details on printing in black and white.<br />

I wish to print with special paper<br />

By using tray 5 (Bypass Tray), you can print with special papers like heavyweight,<br />

transparency, lightweight. Special papers cannot be printed from trays 1<br />

– 4.<br />

“4.2 Printing Non-Standard Paper Size” (P. 66) in “Part 1 <strong>Printer</strong>” for details on printing with special<br />

papers.


I wish to print with the same image quality of the document<br />

J Q & A<br />

You can configure settings to match the document type (photo, text, presentation,<br />

web page etc.) and fine tune the colors.<br />

The On-line Help of the printer driver for details on printing the same image quality as the document.<br />

I wish to install the printer driver in multiple clients<br />

To install the printer driver with similar settings (e.g. printing features, port) to<br />

multiple clients, it will be convenient to use the setup disk creation tool.<br />

“3.4 Installing/Uninstalling the <strong>Printer</strong> Drivers” (P. 50) in “Part 1 <strong>Printer</strong>” for details on how to<br />

install the printer driver.<br />

Print request has been sent but printing is not carried out<br />

Print out the Job History Report or Error History Report and then check the print<br />

job which you sent.<br />

“3.6 Canceling Printing/Checking Job Status” (P. 57) in “Part 1 <strong>Printer</strong>” for details on checking the<br />

print jobs sent.<br />

“6.6 Printing Reports/Lists” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on the Job<br />

History Report and Error History Report.<br />

I wish to upgrade my OS for use with this machine<br />

There are printer drivers for each specific OS. Use the printer driver for your new<br />

OS for installation.<br />

“3.4 Installing/Uninstalling the <strong>Printer</strong> Drivers” (P. 50) in “Part 1 <strong>Printer</strong>” for details on how to<br />

install the printer driver.<br />

I wish to check whether the print job of my print request has been<br />

output<br />

By using the printer monitor of CentreWare Network Services which is included<br />

in the CD-ROM, you can check the status of print jobs on your computer. Also,<br />

you can use CentreWare Internet Services to delete print jobs from your computer.<br />

“Chapter 5 Configuring From Computer (CentreWare Internet Services)” (P. 105) in “Part 1<br />

<strong>Printer</strong>” for details on CentreWare Internet Services and printer monitor.<br />

Appendix<br />

261


Appendix<br />

262<br />

J Q & A<br />

I wish to check the number of sheets copied/printed<br />

You can check the number of sheets copied or printed using the control panel<br />

display. By printing out the Meter Report and <strong>Printer</strong> Meter Report, you can also<br />

check the number of sheets copied or printed according to client (job owner).<br />

“6.5 Confirming the Total Number of Copied/Printed Pages” in “Part 1 Hardware” of the <strong>User</strong><br />

<strong>Guide</strong> (Copier) for details on checking the number of sheets copied or printed.


Index<br />

Numerics<br />

100Base-TX.......................................................... 11<br />

10Base-T............................................................... 11<br />

A<br />

Auto tray switch.................................................... 38<br />

B<br />

Basic printing process......................................... 49<br />

BOOTP .................................................................. 13<br />

Border erase....................................................... 180<br />

C<br />

Cancel print jobs .................................................. 59<br />

Cancel printing .............................................. 57, 58<br />

Cancel scanning ....................................... 156, 157<br />

Canceling jobs in waiting/process..................... 58<br />

CentreWare Internet Services ......................... 106<br />

CentreWare Scanning Services ...................... 119<br />

Changing mailbox viewer settings .................. 212<br />

Check password ................................................ 127<br />

Checking job status ............................................. 60<br />

Checking scanned data in mailbox ................. 203<br />

Checking scanned data on computer............. 206<br />

Checking status of job in process of<br />

scanning .............................................................. 158<br />

Configuring machine (scan) ............................. 133<br />

Configuring scan settings ................................. 160<br />

Connecting by parallel interface ........................ 10<br />

Connecting by Token Ring interface ................ 11<br />

Contrast............................................................... 185<br />

Creating mailbox ................................................ 127<br />

Customizing non-standard paper size.............. 66<br />

D<br />

Delete/save document ...................................... 127<br />

Deleting scanned data in mailbox .................. 203<br />

Deleting scanned data on computer .............. 206<br />

DHCP .................................................................... 13<br />

Document weight .............................................. 144<br />

E<br />

Ethernet interface................................................ 11<br />

EtherTalk (option)................................................... 8<br />

Expanding print areas for printing .................... 89<br />

Extension tray ...................................................... 42<br />

F<br />

Flow of printing .................................................... 36<br />

Flow of setting (scan) ....................................... 120<br />

G<br />

Gradation adjustment ....................................... 257<br />

H<br />

How to display scanner name......................... 208<br />

How to import scanned data ........................... 210<br />

How to scan ....................................................... 154<br />

I<br />

Image compression .......................................... 189<br />

Import scanned data to computer................... 194<br />

Interface board (Token Ring) .......................... 235<br />

Interface cable ..................................................... 10<br />

Internal fonts ...................................................... 234<br />

Internet printing................................................ 7, 30<br />

Internet services ................................................ 112<br />

IPP......................................................................... 30<br />

J<br />

Job template .............................................. 119, 216<br />

Job template list ................................................ 218<br />

Jobs and maintenance screens...................... 114<br />

Index<br />

263


Index<br />

264<br />

JPEG file format ................................................ 154<br />

L<br />

Lighter/Darker .................................................... 185<br />

Loading capacity................................................ 144<br />

Loading documents........................................... 147<br />

Loading in DADF ............................................... 148<br />

Loading on document glass............................. 147<br />

Local printer............................................................ 4<br />

M<br />

Mailbox data....................................................... 194<br />

Mailbox name..................................................... 127<br />

Mailbox password.............................................. 127<br />

Memory allocation ............................................... 22<br />

Mixed size originals........................................... 168<br />

Moving paper guide ............................................ 44<br />

N<br />

NetWare............................................................ 7, 32<br />

Network printer ...................................................... 5<br />

Network scanner utility ..................................... 208<br />

Non-spool mode .................................................. 24<br />

O<br />

On-line help .......................................................... 49<br />

Original orientation ................................... 149, 166<br />

Outline fonts ....................................................... 234<br />

Output color (scan)............................................ 160<br />

Output side ........................................................... 39<br />

P<br />

Paper..................................................................... 37<br />

Paper guide .......................................................... 42<br />

Parallel interface.................................................. 10<br />

PCL memory ........................................................ 23<br />

Port for scanning ............................................... 122<br />

PostScript memory .............................................. 23<br />

Precautions/Limitations .................................... 237<br />

Print area .............................................................. 89<br />

Print page buffer .................................................. 22<br />

Printable area..................................................... 233<br />

<strong>Printer</strong> driver : installing ...................................... 50<br />

<strong>Printer</strong> environments............................................. 4<br />

<strong>Printer</strong> type ......................................................... 232<br />

Printing features................................................... 46<br />

Printing non-standard paper size ...................... 66<br />

Printing procedure ............................................... 46<br />

Printing secure print jobs.................................... 72<br />

Printing special papers ....................................... 64<br />

Printing speed .................................................... 232<br />

Printing system .................................................. 232<br />

R<br />

Receive buffer ...................................................... 23<br />

Reduce/Enlarge ................................................. 174<br />

Resolution........................................................... 232<br />

S<br />

Salutation ............................................................ 122<br />

Sample Print......................................................... 83<br />

Sample print ......................................................... 77<br />

Save in server .................................................... 216<br />

Scan area............................................................ 144<br />

Scan size ............................................................ 171<br />

<strong>Scanner</strong> driver.................................................... 208<br />

Secure print .......................................................... 70<br />

Setting IP address ........................................ 13, 14<br />

Setting port ........................................................... 18<br />

Setting printer environments................................ 3<br />

Setting scanner environment........................... 117<br />

Setting secure print ............................................. 70<br />

Setting spool......................................................... 23<br />

SMB ....................................................................... 26<br />

Spool mode .......................................................... 23<br />

STP ............................................................... 11, 235


Stroke fonts......................................................... 234<br />

Suitable document sizes................................... 144<br />

Suitable paper size ............................................ 144<br />

Switching printer off-line ..................................... 56<br />

T<br />

Target OS (scan) ............................................... 121<br />

TCP/IP (LPD).................................................... 6, 28<br />

TIFF file format................................................... 154<br />

Token Ring (option)............................................... 9<br />

Token Ring interface ........................................... 11<br />

U<br />

Using mailbox..................................................... 122<br />

Using scanning feature ..................................... 122<br />

UTP ............................................................... 11, 235<br />

W<br />

Warm-up time..................................................... 232<br />

Windows network (SMB) ...................................... 5<br />

Index<br />

265


Customer Response Sheet<br />

DocumentCentre C400/320/240 Series <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (<strong>Printer</strong>/<strong>Scanner</strong>) (DE3043E2-1)<br />

To improve our publications, we would appreciate your feedback regarding this guide. Please take a<br />

few moments to complete and return this form to us.<br />

● About Yourself<br />

1. How often do you use this guide?<br />

[ ] Daily [ ] Weekly [ ] Monthly [ ] Infrequently<br />

2. When do you usually refer to the guide?<br />

[ ] Doing a usual operation [ ] Using unfamiliar features<br />

[ ] Solving a problem<br />

3. Which part of the guide do you read frequently?<br />

Chapter/Section/Page:<br />

4. Where do you keep this guide?<br />

5. (Optional)<br />

Your Name: Occupation:<br />

Company or organization:<br />

Address:<br />

● About the <strong>Guide</strong><br />

Strongly Neutral Strongly<br />

agree<br />

disagree<br />

1. It is handy. 1 2 3 4 5<br />

2. It is easy to read. 1 2 3 4 5<br />

3. Titles of chapters and sections make sense. 1 2 3 4 5<br />

4. Information is logically placed. 1 2 3 4 5<br />

5. Referencing is easy. 1 2 3 4 5<br />

6. Content is easy to understand. 1 2 3 4 5<br />

7. The step-by-step instructions are easy to follow. 1 2 3 4 5<br />

8. All necessary information is included. 1 2 3 4 5<br />

9. Illustrations aid in the understanding of content. 1 2 3 4 5<br />

10. The use of color is effective. 1 2 3 4 5<br />

Other comments:<br />

After completing this form, detach and send it to the address below.<br />

(Please use your own envelope and postage stamp.)<br />

Thank you for your cooperation.<br />

<strong>Fuji</strong> <strong>Xerox</strong> Co., Ltd.<br />

KSP R&D 2D7<br />

3-2-1, Sakado, Takatsu-ku<br />

Kawasaki-shi, Kanagawa-ken<br />

JAPAN 213-0012.<br />


DocumentCentre C400/320/240 Series <strong>User</strong> <strong>Guide</strong> (<strong>Printer</strong>/<strong>Scanner</strong>)<br />

Human Interface Design Development<br />

Document Products & Supply Company<br />

<strong>Fuji</strong> <strong>Xerox</strong> Co., Ltd.<br />

DE3043E2-1 (Edition 2)<br />

July 2003<br />

Copyright © 2003 by <strong>Fuji</strong> <strong>Xerox</strong> Co., Ltd.

Hooray! Your file is uploaded and ready to be published.

Saved successfully!

Ooh no, something went wrong!